JP2023063356A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of games.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 10 is provided with presentation performance means (a main side MPU 62 and a sound light side MPU 92) for performing presentations. When a special game state is to be performed, the presentation performance means determines a presentation to be performed in the special game state on the basis of special information related to a prescribed game round to be performed after the special game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art In a game machine such as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various game states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. These effects include, for example, effects that are executed with low frequency, such as ready-to-win effects that are executed with a low probability and effects that are executed only when a big win lottery is won. The effect that is executed with such a low frequency may sometimes be desired to be reproduced by the player for the purpose of appreciation after being executed once. Conventionally, in order to meet such demands of players, gaming machines have been known that execute an effect that reproduces an effect that has been executed once (hereinafter, also referred to as a reproduction effect) (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-172988 A

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further technical improvements in order to make the game more interesting.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following modes.

[form]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game round;
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
When the special game state is executed, the effect to be executed in the special game state is determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game round executed after the special game state. game machine.

According to the gaming machine of the above configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the design and display surface 41a which are variably displayed in a design display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of various counters. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a win-win table stored in a win-win table storage area; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing which a pachinko machine performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a suggestive effect, a specific end effect, and a specific start effect. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for start mouths. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. It is a flow chart which shows condition judging processing. 9 is a flowchart showing ending time setting processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing command handling processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows opening production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows ending production setting processing. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is a time chart explaining the process which the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment performs. It is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of the symbol display device when executing the suggestive effect in the preceding game round. It is a time chart which shows the process which the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment performs. It is a time chart which shows the process which the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment performs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a setting process for effect types; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an object A, which is an object image; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an object B, which is an object image; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an object C, which is an object image; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for object A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement/timing setting table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a preview effect in which a plurality of objects are combined; 10 is a flow chart showing a process for setting an effect type; FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of a setting process for effect types in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display object table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for AC; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3) is set; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for C; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an AB display pattern table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) is set; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1) is set; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) is set; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a BC display pattern table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) is set; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (B2-B3/C1) is set; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (B1/C1-C2-C3) is set; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an ABC display pattern table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is set; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3) is set; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is set; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a process for setting the effect type in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the sequel production|presentation performed as a ready-to-win production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an object D that can be used for the advance notice effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an image (object D+image E) obtained by combining image E with object D;

An embodiment of a game machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
A3. Outline of Processing by Gaming Machine A4. Various processing executed in the main controller:
A5. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
A6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth embodiment:
E. Fifth embodiment (an example of processing for setting the effect type):
F. Sixth embodiment (another example of processing for setting effect type):
G. Variant:
H. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") as one embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button for stopping shooting of the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor is provided for detecting a dynamic operation amount based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. As shown in FIG. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, a plurality of general winning holes 32 are provided on the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are both open upward, and arranged vertically so that the first starting port 33 is higher than the second starting port 34 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. When a game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) with the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning the prize, and flows down to the second It is possible to win a prize to the starting port 34. - 特許庁In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big win lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can win and a closed state. The open/close execution mode is the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing door 36b is in the open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state. That is, when a big win is won as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the first starting port 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning to the big winning port 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 becomes possible. Similarly, when a big win is won as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the prize to the big winning port 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 is possible. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first result display section 37a and a second result display section 37b. Each of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the jackpot lottery triggered by winning the first starting port 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a changes the display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The second result display unit 37b, when the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the second starting port 34 is performed, changes the display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first result display portion 37a and the second result display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory open lottery triggered by the winning of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. In addition, the special figure unit 37 and the general figure unit 38 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery process and lottery results.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins in the variable winning device 36 until either one of the conditions is satisfied. It is a game that continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 is composed of a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first result display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning to the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. Further, when the second result display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the winning to the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. . The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted when the jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 4A, the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns representing numbers 1 to 8. As shown in FIG. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one piece of special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and displays the first result display section 37a or the second result for each game round. In either one of the display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information is displayed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, the pending number based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four at maximum.

A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, the main control board 61, as various detection sensors 67a to 67e, is provided in various winning ports such as the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. connected to multiple detection sensors. The main side MPU 62 of the main control board 61 performs winning determination as to whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA during the game has entered each winning hole. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on winnings to the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on winnings to the through gate 35.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45. display control.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the winning to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the winning to the first starting opening 33 is specified. When it does, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when the winning to the second start port 34 is specified, it corresponds to the payout of one game ball. A prize command is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls. A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game cycle, and the like are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display unit 45, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when judging jackpot types, such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used for a ready-to-win lottery for determining whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the pattern display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b. The pending information storage area 64b is composed of a first pending area Ra, a second pending area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total pending number storage area. When the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 sequentially, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning is chronologically stored in the reservation information storage area 64b. stored in

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start hole 33 or the second start hole . Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 34. is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of winning. The values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 as a success/failure table.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. FIG. 7(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, and FIG. 7(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7(a), under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to for the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), under the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery, 20 random numbers are selected to win the jackpot. Also, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group for the jackpot random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot in the high probability mode. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when judging jackpot types such as variable probability jackpots and normal jackpots. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole . More specifically, it is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball has won the first start port 33, and the reservation information is stored at the timing when the game ball has won the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot types in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for big winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It can be set to continue until the number of On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the opening and closing door 36b. can be set to continue until there are six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the open mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a variable probability lottery mode for performing a jackpot lottery using a high probability win/fail table as a win/fail table, and a win/fail table as a win/fail table. A normal lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using a success/failure table for low probability can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 7, when the jackpot lottery is performed using the high-probability win-or-fail table, the jackpot is won more than when the jackpot lottery is performed using the low-probability win-or-fail table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar form to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 is the same, but in the high frequency support mode The number of times that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role opening win is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time may be set longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first start port 33 is higher than the second start port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start port 34 is more likely than the first start port 33. Higher chance of winning. When a prize is won in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player should play the game while not reducing the number of balls he has. can be done.

In addition, the configuration in which the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is higher than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning an open role is increased. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of secured time are prepared after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and the next electric accessory open lottery is performed, the high frequency support mode has a low frequency It may be set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the support mode. Furthermore, the number of opening times is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured after one electric accessary item opening lottery is performed and the next electric accessary item opening lottery is performed is reduced. Shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the probability of winning, by applying any one or any combination of conditions, even if the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode is increased good.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can be set with a plurality of types of jackpots. In this embodiment, when a big win is won in a big win lottery, a plurality of types of big wins are sorted using a big win type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. FIG. 8(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 8( a ), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. , "28 to 33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 8(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the second start port 34 are the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot. is set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. corresponds to That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all jackpots based on winnings to the second starting port 34 are variable probability jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot win based on the winning to the first start port 33 and the second jackpot win. It is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning to the starting port 34.例文帳に追加

In this way, the mode of distributing the jackpot types between the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 has a clear difference in the advantages for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting to win a prize in the second starting hole 34 out of the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 . In addition, when the win/loss lottery results in a failure, there is no transition to the open/close execution mode, and the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode do not change.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port . Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and the timing when the game ball wins the second start port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the RAM64. Then, after moving to the execution area AE, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. It is checked against a table to determine whether or not to generate reach. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the player wins the jackpot and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 decides whether to generate a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, thereby forming the reach line. , in a situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol row Z2 performs a variable display of the symbol to achieve a reach. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. FIG. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b and at the start of variation of the symbols by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 249, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be open, and if C4=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be closed.

In addition, a combination of a set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra corresponds to the reservation information related to the first start port 33, and the second reservation area Rb A combination of a set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in corresponds to the hold information related to the second start port 34, and these hold information are the special information in the present invention Equivalent to.

A3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 9 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. In this description, the features of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described using two cases, case a1 and case a2, as examples.

FIG. 9(a) shows, as case a1, that a jackpot lottery is won in the first game round (hereinafter also simply referred to as "jackpot"), and the jackpot is won in the second game round that is executed after the first game round. It shows the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the lottery is lost. In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot lottery in the game round immediately before the first game round is lost and there is no other game round between the first game round and the second game round. give an explanation. It should be noted that another game round may exist between the first game round and the second game round. The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect. The notice effect is a effect that is executed immediately before or after the start of the pattern variation, and is a effect for suggesting to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. The ready-to-win effect is an effect to be executed after the ready-to-win effect, and is an effect to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the ready-to-win performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification performance for notifying the player of the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the first game cycle. In the first game round, a big win is announced as a result announcement effect.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The special game state is a state in which a privilege is given to the player. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting the start of the opening/closing execution mode as the opening effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening/closing execution mode in which opening and closing of the opening/closing door 36b are repeated. During the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes an ending effect. As shown in FIG. 9(a), in this description, the period for executing the ending effect is called the ending period.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a special game state reproduction effect, and a specific end effect during the ending period. The suggestive effect is a effect that suggests reproducing the effect that has already been executed. In the present embodiment, the suggestive effect is a effect suggesting reproduction of the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect, and result notification effect selected and executed from a plurality of types in the first game cycle. Also, the special game state reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect that has already been executed in the special game state.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a suggestive effect, a specific end effect, and a specific start effect, which will be described later. FIG. 10(a) shows a suggested effect, FIG. 10(b) shows a specific end effect, and FIG. 10(c) shows a specific start effect. The suggestive effect shown in FIG. 10(a) is an effect suggesting that the female character reproduces the effect executed in the first game round, that is, the advance notice effect, the ready-to-win effect, and the result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestive effect in the ending period, and then, as the special game state reproduction effect, the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed in the first game round. run it again. In this embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the notice effect, the ready-to-win effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game round are reproduced. Only part of the announcement production may be reproduced. For example, when executing a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, and a result notification effect as special game state reproduction effects, the reach effect and the result notification effect are reproduced preferentially, and some or all of the notice effect is omitted and executed. good too. By omitting some or all of the notice effects that are executed at a high frequency in normal times, and preferentially reproducing reach effects and result notification effects (jackpot notifications) that are executed only during reach or jackpot, players can A special game state reproduction performance can be executed by narrowing down to performances that are strongly desired to be reproduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the variable display and the stop display of the symbols are reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a when the special game state reproduction effect is executed are actually displayed in the first game round. The content of the design is partly different.

After executing the special game state reproduction performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a specific end performance. FIG. 10(b) shows an example of a specific end effect. As shown in the figure, the specific end effect in this embodiment is a effect that suggests that the female character has finished the special game state reproduction effect.

The description is returned to FIG. 9(a). The pachinko machine 10 ends the ending period and the special game state when the specific ending effect ends. After that, the second game round is executed. The jackpot lottery related to the second game round is lost. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal notice effect (also called normal notice effect) for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery and a result notification effect (losing notice). Case a1 has been described above.

Next, case a2 will be described. FIG. 9(b) shows the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 as case a2 when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round as well. .

As shown in FIG. 9(b), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect. After executing the ready-to-win performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification performance for notifying the player of the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the first game cycle. In the first game round, a big win is announced as a result announcement effect.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect suggesting the start of the opening/closing execution mode as the opening effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening/closing execution mode in which opening and closing of the opening/closing door 36b are repeated. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes the ending effect during the ending period.

In the case of case a2, unlike case a1, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestion effect during the ending period. The content of the suggestive effect is the same as the content of the suggestive effect executed in case a1. The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state when the suggestive effect ends. That is, the ending period for case a2 is shorter than the ending period for case a1.

The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state when the suggestive effect ends. After that, the second game round is executed. In case a2, the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round as well. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game round reproduction effect as an effect in the second game round. The game round reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect that has already been executed in the game round. In this embodiment, the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced as the game round reproduction effect. That is, the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect (jackpot notification) executed in the first game round are executed. In this case, this result notification effect (jackpot notification) has a function as a part of the game round reproduction effect, and has a function as a result notification for the big win lottery in the second game round. Then, the second game round ends when the game round reproduction effect ends.

It should be noted that, although it will be described later using a flowchart, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times in which the jackpot lottery is won is constant. That is, in the case a2, since both the first game round and the second game round are game rounds in which the jackpot lottery was won, the fluctuation time of the first game round and the fluctuation of the second game round time is the same. Therefore, the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed in the first game round can be executed as the game round reproduction effect in the second game round.

In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the fluctuation times of the game rounds in which the jackpot lottery is won are all constant. , the variation time of the game round at the time of the big win may be different each time. In this case, if the second game round is longer than the first game round, at the start of the second game round, the time difference between the fluctuation times of the second game round and the first game round (Surplus time) may be used to perform a suggestion effect prepared in advance. By preparing a plurality of types of suggestive performances for each length of the surplus time, the suggestive performance can be executed at the start of the second game round even if the surplus time is different each time. The suggestive effect executed using the surplus time is executed after the suggestive effect executed in the special game state after the first game cycle. Therefore, the content of the suggestive effect executed using the surplus time is set such that the suggestive effect executed in the special game state and the suggestive effect executed using the surplus time have continuity. good too. By doing so, even when the second game round is longer than the first game round, the game round reproduction effect can be executed in the second game round without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, when the second game round is shorter than the first game round, only a part of the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed in the first game round is executed as the game repeat reproduction effect. may be For example, when a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, and a result notification effect are executed as a game replay effect, the reach effect and the result notification effect are preferentially reproduced, and part or all of the notice effect is omitted to reproduce the game replay effect. may be executed. By omitting some or all of the notice effects that are executed at a high frequency in normal times, and preferentially reproducing reach effects and result notification effects (jackpot notifications) that are executed only during reach or jackpot, players can It is possible to preferentially reproduce an effect that is strongly desired to be reproduced.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state after the second game round ends. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start performance in the opening performance of the special game state. The specific start performance is executed as the opening performance of the subsequent special game state when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game round is won and the game round reproduction performance is executed in the second game round.

FIG. 10(c) shows an example of a specific start effect. The specific start effect shown in the figure is a effect suggesting that the female character has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round, and is in a special game state (open/close) due to the big win in the second game round. This is an effect suggesting that the execution mode) will start. The pachinko machine 10 executes the opening/closing execution mode and the ending effect after executing the specific start effect. In this case, the effect and ending effect (normal ending effect) executed in the opening/closing execution mode are effects executed at the time of a normal jackpot. The normal ending effect executed as the ending effect is an effect suggesting the end of the special game state.

The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 has been described above using two cases, case a1 and case a2. As explained in the case a1, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is lost, the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed after the suggestion effect are executed in the first game cycle. The effect is executed as a special game state reproduction effect for reproducing the effect, and the player also recognizes that the effect is for reproducing the already executed effect. On the other hand, as in case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the advance notice effect, the ready-to-win effect and the result notification effect which are executed after the suggestion effect have already been executed in terms of effect. However, in reality, it is a game round reproduction effect executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. When the player has previously viewed the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1, the player executes the game cycle reproduction effect in the second game cycle of the case a2 in the first game cycle in the same manner as in the case a1. As well as recognizing that it is merely a reproduction of the performance shown in the previous game, it is difficult to anticipate winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. In such a state, after the announcement effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed in the second game round, when the player is informed that he or she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round by the result notification effect. At that time, for the first time, the notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the second game round are not merely reproductions of the effects executed in the first game round, but the second game. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the time. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game cycle reproduction effect in the case a2 in this way, the game is given a sense of surprise, and at least part of the effect executed in the first game cycle is reproduced. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player for the performance to be performed. In addition, by making the second game round in case a2 develop unexpectedly by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the case of case a2, although the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round, it suggests reproducing the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect, and result notification effect executed in the first game round. Since the suggestive effect is executed, it is even more difficult for the player to anticipate winning the big winning lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game.

Also, as in case a2, if the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect executed in the first game round are reproduced as they are and executed in the second game round, the result notification effect in the second game round is executed. Even if this is done, there is a possibility that the player will not notice that he or she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round, but after the second game round ends, the specific start effect will be executed in the special game state. , the player can be made to recognize that he/she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game cycle at the time when the specific start performance is executed.

A4. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, a specific example of control for executing the processing shown in case a1 and case a2 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game round, the main side MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves detection information (winning detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step S102.

In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, a prize winning process for the starting opening associated with the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the winning process for the start opening in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through winning process in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Winning processing for the starting gate>
Next, the prize winning process for the start opening will be described. The prize winning process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11: S104).

FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the prize winning process for the starting gate. In step S201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start hole 33 whether or not the game ball has won the first start hole 33 (start win). In step S201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the winning to the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S209.

In step S201, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting hole 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, and whether or not the game ball has won the second starting hole 34 is checked. 2 It is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the start port 34 .

In step S205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has not won the second starting hole 34 (S205: NO), the winning process for this starting hole ends.

In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step S208.

In step S208, the start reservation number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reservation number RbN), which is the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start reservation number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending starts based on winnings to the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S209.

In step S209, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S209, when the number N of starting suspensions is not less than the upper limit (S209: NO), the winning process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions in the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S212.

In step S212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 11) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, step In S210, 1 is added and stored in the corresponding storage area. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 11) The value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S210. Further, when the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 11) is It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S210. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the reservation information before the main control device 60 becomes the target of the big winning lottery. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S213, the process proceeds to step S214.

In step S214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information (pending information) of each value of big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The pending command indicates that the winning to the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 has occurred and the judgment result by the first determination process based on the pending information acquired based on the winning, and the pending information is the main control device This is a command to confirm with the sub-side control device before becoming an object of the jackpot lottery by 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 15 : step S502) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is increased. to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the second start port 34, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S214, the main MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the start opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 12: S213) of the winning process for the starter.

FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, in the first determination process, based on the pending information, determination results such as determination of whether the jackpot lottery is successful, determination of the type of jackpot, determination of presence or absence of reach occurrence, etc. This is a process that is executed before the lottery is targeted.

In step S301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning of the starting opening in the winning process for the starting opening (FIG. 12) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S302 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this winning prize is executed as a game round. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed by the winning prior to this winning is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot occurring before the jackpot lottery due to this winning. By doing so, the lottery mode at the time when the big win lottery due to the winning of this time is executed as a game round is determined.

In step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the winning of this time is executed as a game round, (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and the success/failure table storage area. The success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round (S302: NO), the process proceeds to step S304, and the high probability mode As a result of referring to the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S305: YES), the process proceeds to step S306, and the value is stored in the storage area due to the winning in the starting port this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the process proceeds to step S307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the winning in the first start port 33, the distribution table for the first start port is referred to, If it is obtained based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step S307, the process proceeds to step S308.

In step S308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step S308, when it is determined that the variable probability jackpot is supported (S308: YES), the process proceeds to step S309, and the variable probability jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S308 that the variable probability jackpot is not supported (S308: NO), the process proceeds to step S310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S305: NO), the process proceeds to step S311, and is stored in the storage area by the winning in the starting port this time. read out the value of the reach random number counter C3. After that, the process proceeds to step S312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S313: YES), the process proceeds to step S314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S313 that the reach occurrence is not supported (S313: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the prize winning process for through will be described. Winning processing for through is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing ( FIG. 11 : S105).

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the winning process for through. In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. In step S401, when it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S401: YES), the process proceeds to step S402, and whether or not the number SN of reserved accessories is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). determine whether Incidentally, the reserved accessory number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S401: NO), the through winning process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S402 that the reserved role item number SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (S402: YES), the process proceeds to step S403 to add 1 to the reserved role item number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S404.

In step S404, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step S103 (FIG. 11) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the electrician holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the win-win process for through is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is not less than the upper limit (S402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Winning processing for through is terminated without storing the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . Also, when commands related to effects such as variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S502, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S505, the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S502). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S508, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S508: NO), in steps S509 and S510, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S509, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Also, in step S510, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S508 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S508: YES), the process returns to step S502, and each process from step S502 to step S507 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S502 to step S507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 15: S505).

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special game state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the opening period flag, opening/closing execution mode flag, and ending period flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period.

If it is determined in step S601 that any one of the opening period flag, the opening/closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S601: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in progress, and the processing after step S602 is performed. This game round control process is terminated without executing any of them. That is, when the game is in the special game state, no game round is started regardless of whether or not the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is won. On the other hand, in step S601, when it is determined that the game is not in the special game state (S601: NO), the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is in the process of changing display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display ends.

In step S602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (S602: NO), the process proceeds to step S603 to step S605 for game round start processing. In step S603, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, when it is determined in step S603 that the total number of reserved coins CRN is "0" (S603: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S603 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S603: NO), the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S606, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (S602: YES), the process for progressing game rounds in steps S607 to S609 is executed.

In step S607, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S607, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time information stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in a variable time setting process (FIG. 19), which will be described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S607 that the variable time has not elapsed (S607: NO), the process proceeds to step S608 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After executing step S608, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S607 that the variation time has elapsed (S607: YES), the process proceeds to step S609 to execute variation end processing. The variation end processing is to change the result display section so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the result display section determined in the variation start processing (FIG. 18) to be described later is displayed on the result display section related to the current game round. display control. After executing step S609, the game round control process is terminated.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 16: S604) of the game round control process.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S701, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first among the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) (the hold information stored in the first area information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 6) in time series than the reservation information stored first among the reservation information stored in time series in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 6) When the reservation information stored first among the reserved information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S701, the pending information can be processed in the order stored in the first pending area Ra or the second pending area Rb.

When it is determined in step S701 that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S701: YES), data setting processing for the first reservation area in steps S702 to S707 is executed. On the other hand, in step S701, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S701: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S708 to S713 is executed.

In step S702, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step S703 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S705.

In step S705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S705, the process proceeds to step S706.

In step S706, if the second result display flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not ON, the state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying which of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S707.

In step S707, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S502 of the normal processing (FIG. 15). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S701, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S701: NO), The process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, 1 is subtracted from the second start-up reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, 1 is subtracted from the total number of reserved items CRN, and the process proceeds to step S710 to move the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S711.

In step S711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S711, the process proceeds to step S712.

In step S712, if the second result display flag in the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S713.

In step S713, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S502 of the normal processing (FIG. 15). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 16: S605).

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S801, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and then turned off when a normal jackpot is won. In step S801, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S801:YES), it progresses to step S802.

In step S802, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S801: NO), the process proceeds to step S803.

In step S803, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7(a). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S804.

In step S804, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (big hit lottery) in step S802 or step S803 is a big win. In step S804, if the result of the success/failure determination is the jackpot winning (S804: YES), in steps S805 to S812, to set the game result in the case of jackpot winning and to set the stop result process.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the second result display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S805: NO), the process advances to step S806 to refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 8A). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S805: YES), the process proceeds to step S807, and a distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 8B). Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in After executing the process of step S806 or step S807. The process proceeds to step S808.

In step S808, it is determined whether or not the type of the jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is the variable probability jackpot. In step S808, when it is determined that the game result is a variable probability jackpot (S808: YES), the process proceeds to step S809.

In step S809, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot sorted in step S806 or step S807 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S809, the process proceeds to step S810.

In step S810, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S814.

In step S808, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is not a probability variable jackpot (S808: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, to step S811 move on.

In step S811, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game turn in which the normal jackpot is won, the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S806 or step S807 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

In step S812, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 16R normal jackpot, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 8R normal jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S814.

In step S804, if the result of the big win lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not a big win (S804: NO), the process proceeds to step S813 to execute stop result setting processing for loss. The stop result setting process for the time of loss is to end the variable display in a state in which either stop result is displayed in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game turn that results in a loss. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S813, the process proceeds to step S814.

In step S814, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game turn in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big win or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S814, the process proceeds to step S815.

In step S815, it is determined whether or not the second result display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S815: NO), the process proceeds to step S816 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S814. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S815 that the second result display section flag is ON (S815: YES), the process proceeds to step S817 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the variable time set in step S814. After executing step S816 or step S817, the process proceeds to step S818.

In step S818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information as jackpot type information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S816 to S818 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S502 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S818, the process proceeds to step S819.

In step S819, the result display portion corresponding to the current game round out of the first result display portion 37a and the second result display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display section corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first result display section 37a, and the variable display is started, When the second result display section flag is ON, the second result display section 37b is specified as the result display section corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S819, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time>
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 18: S814).

FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing processing for setting the variable time. In step S901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable probability jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, the variable time table for big hit stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times in which the jackpot lottery is won is constant. After that, in step S904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S902, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won (S902: NO), the process proceeds to step S905 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (S905) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is not won in the above step S902, reach occurs among the game rounds in which the jackpot lottery is not won in step S905. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S906. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S906, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, in step S904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S905, when it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained. After that, in step S904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set such that the greater the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable time. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the big win is won and when the reach is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 15: S506).

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the game state transition processing. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is, as described with reference to FIG. 9, a period for executing the ending effect in the special game state.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1001: NO), the process advances to step S1002 to determine whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when ending the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step S1003, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S1003: NO), the process proceeds to step S1004, timing at which the symbol variation display in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b ends. It is determined whether or not. In step S1004, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S1004: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In step S1004, when it is determined that it is the timing when the variable display ends (S1004: YES), the process proceeds to step S1005, and the game result of the current game round (the result of the jackpot lottery) changes to the opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not they correspond. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, and 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S1005: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S1005, when it is determined that the game result of the current game round (result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (S1005: YES), the process proceeds to step S1006 to enter the high probability mode. Turn off the flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special game state. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After executing step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1008.

In step S1008, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 at step S502 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S1008, the process advances to step S1009 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is ON (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1010.

In step S1010, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S1010 that the opening period has ended (S1010: YES), the process advances to step S1011 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S1012.

In step S1012, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S1012, the process proceeds to step S1013.

In step S1013, the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R probability variation flag) stored in the RAM 64 are checked. In step S1013, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM64 is the 16R probability variable flag or the 16R normal flag (S1013: YES), proceed to step S1014, provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64 "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the door 36b has been opened.

On the other hand, in step S1013, when it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM64 is the 8R probability variation flag or the 8R normal flag (S1013: NO), the process proceeds to step S1015, provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64 "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1. After executing step S1014 or step S1015, the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1016, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S1002, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S1002: YES), the process proceeds to step S1017 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. Specifically, when the big winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a driving state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning a big prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the large winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning driving unit is operated under the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the large winning opening 36a or the number of opening limits has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped, and the big winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S1017, the process proceeds to step S1018.

In step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1018: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1018: YES), the process proceeds to step S1019 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After executing step S1019, the process proceeds to step S1020.

In step S1020, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1021.

In step S1021, condition determination processing is executed. The condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not case a2 shown in FIG. 9 is applicable. Specifically, by winning the jackpot lottery in the next game round, the suggestion production is executed in the ending period, and the production (notice production, reach production and It is determined whether or not to execute the process of reproducing the result notification effect (jackpot notification). The condition determination processing will be described later. After executing step S1021, the process proceeds to step S1022.

In step S1022, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1022, the process proceeds to step S1023.

In step S1023, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S502 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S1023, the process proceeds to step S1024.

In step S1024, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is ON (S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1025.

In step S1025, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S1022), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". The value of the fourth timer counter area T4 is set in the ending time setting process (FIG. 22), which will be described later. If it is determined in step S1025 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S1025: YES), the process proceeds to step S1026.

In step S1026, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S1027 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S1027, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S1025, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S1025: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (1017 in FIG. 20) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. When it is determined in step S1101 that the big winning opening 36a is not open (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1102 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S1102, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1102: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1102: NO), the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1103: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1103, when it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1103: YES), the process proceeds to step S1104, and the variable prize winning drive unit is operated to open the big prize winning port 36a. 36c is driven. After that, the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all of the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ” may be set. After executing step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1106.

In step S1106, an open command is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The open command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process ( FIG. 15 : step S502). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been started, and the content of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 is set to the big prize opening 36a. is updated to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has started, and also changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the big winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to being started.

In step S1101, when it is determined that the big winning opening 36a is open (step S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1107: NO), the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable prize winning device 36 whether or not the game ball has won the prize winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1108 that no prize has been won (S1108: NO), the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1108 that a prize has been won (S1108: YES), the process proceeds to step S1109, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize counter area PC. After that, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1110, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S1110: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1107: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step S1110 In (S1110: YES), the process proceeds to step S1111 to execute the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening 36a. After that, the process proceeds to step S1112.

In step S1112, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S1113 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S1113, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1113: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1113: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. After executing step S1114, the process advances to step S1115 to set a close command. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

This set closing command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a is completed, and is a command that includes information for normal processing. is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process ( FIG. 15 : step S502). Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 to the large prize winning opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41. Update to match what you have done.

<Condition judgment processing>
Next, condition determination processing will be described. The condition determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 20: S1021).

As described above, the condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not case a2 shown in FIG. 9 applies. The condition for enabling the processing of case a2 is to win the jackpot lottery in the first game round and win the jackpot lottery in the second game round. This condition determination process is executed immediately before the end of the opening/closing execution mode after winning the big win lottery in the game round, and is the process of determining whether or not the big win lottery will be won in the next game round.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing condition determination processing. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the pending number CRN>0. By executing this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a game round immediately after the special game state when executing the special game state after the first game round. When the game round does not exist, the game round corresponding to the second game round in which the game round reproduction effect can be executed immediately after the suggestive effect does not exist, and the processing of case a2 cannot be executed. .

If it is determined in step S1201 that the number of pending items CRN>0 (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1201 that the pending number CRN>0 is not true (S1201: NO), this condition determination process is terminated.

In step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the next game round is read. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning to the starting port in the winning process for the starting port (FIG. 12) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S1203.

In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the normal jackpot flag is ON. By executing the process, it is determined whether the big winning lottery for the next game round is executed in the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

In step S1203, when it is determined that the normal jackpot flag is ON (S1203: YES), the process advances to step S1204 to refer to the low-probability mode win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S1203, when it is determined that the normal jackpot flag is not ON (S1203: NO), the process proceeds to step S1205, and the win/fail table for the high probability mode stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a is referred to. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S1206, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. In the case of case a2 (FIG. 9), the effect duplication avoidance flag further reproduces the game round reproduction effect executed in the second game round in the ending period of the special game state after the second game round. A flag used to prevent execution. In step S1207, when it is determined that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1207: NO), the process proceeds to step S1208, and the condition establishment flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S1209.

In step S1209, a condition establishment command is set. The condition establishment command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 on the sub side recognize that the condition establishment flag is ON. The condition satisfaction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process ( FIG. 15 : step S502) of the normal process. After that, the condition determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time in step S1206 does not correspond to the jackpot (S1206: NO), or if it is determined that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON in step S1207 (S1207: YES), the condition determination process is terminated.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 20: S1022).

FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the ending time setting process. In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON.

In step S1301, when it is determined that the effect overlap avoidance flag is not ON (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1302 to determine whether or not the condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1302 that the condition establishment flag is ON (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, "3000" (6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4, which is the ending time timer. The process of step S1303 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game round in case a2 of FIG. In case a2, only the suggestive effect is executed in the ending period, and the reproduction of the effect executed in the first game round is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 6 seconds are secured as the ending time required for execution of the suggestive effect. After executing step S1303, the process advances to step S1304 to turn off the condition establishment flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, an effect duplication avoidance flag is turned ON. After that, the ending time setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1302 that the condition establishment flag is not ON (S1302: NO), the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, "15000" (30 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1306 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game round in case a1 of FIG. In the case of case a1, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, 30 seconds are secured as the ending time necessary for executing the suggestive effect and the special game state reproduction effect. In this embodiment, the time required for the suggestive effect is fixed at 6 seconds, and the time required for the special game state reproduction effect is fixed at 24 seconds. After executing step S1303, the ending time setting process is terminated.

In step S1301, when it is determined that the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON (S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1307, and an effect overlap avoidance command is set. The effect duplication avoidance command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 on the sub side recognize that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. The effect duplication avoidance command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 15 : step S502) of the normal process. After executing step S1307, the process proceeds to step S1308.

In step S1308, "4000" (8 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1308 is the process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the second game round in case a2 of FIG. In the case of case a2, a normal ending effect is executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, 8 seconds are secured as the ending time required for execution of the normal ending effect.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 20: S1027).

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the RAM 64 has a flag corresponding to the variable probability jackpot as the jackpot type flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step S1401, when it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1402 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process advances to step S1404 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process proceeds to step S1405.

In step S1405, 100 is set in the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S1410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S1401: NO), the process advances to step S1407 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After that, the process proceeds to step S1408.

In step S1408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S1409, and 100 is set in the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 15: S507).

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step S1501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S1501 that the supported flag is not ON (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1502.

In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S1502: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504.

In step S1504, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step S1504 that it is time to end the variable display (S1504: YES), the process advances to step S1505 to set off display, and then ends the electronic role support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1506.

In step S1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S1506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (S1506: YES), the process proceeds to step S1507.

In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the process advances to step S1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S1507 (S1507: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S1508 (S1508: YES), the process proceeds to step S1509 to perform the electric accessary item opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step S1510.

In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S1509 is support winning. In step S1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S1510: YES), the process proceeds to step S1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S1512. On the other hand, in step S1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S1510: NO), the process proceeds to step S1512 without executing the process of step S1511.

In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. When it is determined in step S1512 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1512: YES), the process proceeds to step S1513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1512 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S1512: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S1513, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S1513, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S1513: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1513 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S1514 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S1515.

In step S1515, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S1515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process ( FIG. 15 : step S502) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low-frequency support command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S1507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S1507: YES), or if it is determined in step S1518 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S1508: NO), the process proceeds to step S1516, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S1517.

In step S1517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S1516 is support winning. In step S1517, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S1517: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1517, if it is determined that the support win has been won (S1517: YES), the process advances to step S1518 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is ON (S1502: YES), the process advances to step S1519 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S1519, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1519: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general pattern unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1519: YES), the process proceeds to step S1520.

In step S1520, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S1521 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S1501, when it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (S1501: YES), the process advances to step S1522 to execute an electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control processing>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electrician opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 25: S1522) of electrician support processing.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step S1602.

In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1602: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step S1602, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1602: YES), the process proceeds to step S1603 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the flow advances to step S1605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S1605: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S1605: YES), the process advances to step S1606 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1607 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1607: NO), the electric opening/closing control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1607: YES), the process advances to step S1608 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. . After that, the process proceeds to step S1609.

In step S1609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S1609: NO), the process advances to step S1610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S1610 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S1610: YES), the process advances to step S1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that the open/close execution mode is set (S1609: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step S1610 (S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

A5. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 27 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

A6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (eg, 4 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, command handling processing for performing processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703.

In step S1703, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the command handling process of step S1702. After executing step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704.

In step S1704, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read out in the command handling process of step S1702. After executing step S1704, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 28: S1702).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. As described above, in the command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1801 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1801: YES), the process advances to step S1802 to execute pending command processing. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1802, the process proceeds to step S1803. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1801 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1801: NO), the process proceeds to step S1803 without executing step S1802.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1803 that the command for variation and the type command have been received (S1803: YES), the process proceeds to step S1804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1803 that the variation command and type command have not been received (S1803: NO), the process proceeds to step S1805.

In step S1804, effect setting processing is executed. In the effect setting process, the advance notice effect to be executed in the current game round, the ready-to-win effect, the stop pattern, the variable display pattern, and the like are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1804, the process advances to step S1805.

In step S1805, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. In step S1805, when it is determined that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1805: YES), the process advances to step S1806 to execute opening effect setting processing. In the opening effect setting process, the type of the jackpot contained in the opening command received this time is specified, the contents of the opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot are set, and the information corresponding to the effect content is set. An opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. - 特許庁After that, the process proceeds to step S1807.

In step S1807, opening/closing execution mode effect setting processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect setting process, the content of the effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the information on the number of rounds and the information on the jackpot type included in the opening command. After executing step S1807, the process advances to step S1808.

If it is determined in step S1805 that the opening command has not been received (S1805: NO), the process proceeds to step S1808 without executing steps S1806 and S1807.

In step S1808, it is determined whether or not a condition fulfillment command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S1808, if it is determined that the condition fulfillment command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (S1808: YES), the process proceeds to step S1809. Turn ON the side condition satisfaction flag. After executing step S1809, the process proceeds to step S1810. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1808 that the condition establishment command has not been received (S1808: NO), the process proceeds to step S1810 without executing step S1809.

In step S1810, it is determined whether or not an effect duplication avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S1810, when it is determined that the effect duplication avoidance command is received from the main side MPU 62 (S1810: YES), the process proceeds to step S1811, and the sound stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94 The light side effect duplication flag is turned ON. After executing step S1811, the process proceeds to step S1812. On the other hand, in step S1810, when it determines with not having received the production duplication avoidance command (S1810:NO), it progresses to step S1812, without performing step S1811.

In step S1812, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received. In step S1812, when it determines with having received the ending command (S1812:YES), it progresses to step S1813 and performs an ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the ending effect for the ending period is set based on the information about the ending time included in the ending command received this time and the ON/OFF information of the sound and light side condition establishment flag. be. The ending effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1813, the process proceeds to step S1814.

If it is determined in step S1812 that no ending command has been received (S1812: NO), the process proceeds to step S1814 without executing step S1813.

In step S1814, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, setting of effect contents corresponding to the high-frequency support mode command, the low-frequency support mode command, the open command, and the close command is performed. Further, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 . After executing step S1814, this command handling process is terminated.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 29: S1802).

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. As described above, the pending command handling process is a process that is executed when a pending command is received from the main MPU 62 . Processing of each step executed in the pending command handling processing will be described below.

In step S1901, update processing at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pending information acquired based on winning to the first starting port 33, the number of pending information acquired based on winning to the second starting port 34, and these pending A process for enabling the sound and light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S1901 will be described later. In the following, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is also referred to as "first pending number", and the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 It is also referred to as the "second reserved number", and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as the "total reserved number". After executing step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, pending display control processing is executed. Specifically, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the first starting port 33 specified in step S1901, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the second starting port 34 and Based on, the display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be lit) of the first reservation display portion 37c and the second reservation display portion 37d is controlled. After executing step S1902, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update processing at the time of winning>
Next, update processing at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending command handling process (FIG. 30: S1901).

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing update processing at the time of winning. In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33. FIG. In step S2001, if it is determined that the pending command read this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2002, sound light The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2004.

In step S2001, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was not transmitted based on the winning of the first starting port 33 (S2001: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting port 34, the process advances to step S2003 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. . The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the winning to the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2004.

The reason why steps S2002 and S2003 are performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. For this reason, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the hold information is not displayed in the main controller 60. While the information is held in memory, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there is no hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step S2004, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. In the total pending number counter area, the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step S2004, the update process at the time of the main winning is ended.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 29: S1804).

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the contents of the effect to be executed in the current game round. . Specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described below.

In step S2101, the variable command received this time is read, and information on the presence or absence of the big win, the type of the big win, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the variable time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the process proceeds to step S2102.

In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2102 that the sound/light side condition establishment flag is not ON (S2102: NO), the process proceeds to step S2103.

In step S2103, a process for setting the effect type is executed. The effect type setting process executed in step S2103 is a process of setting the contents of the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect in the game round. The effect type setting process will be described later. After executing step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104.

In step S2104, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R variable variable jackpot, an 8R variable variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is the 16R normal jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of losing, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does not materialize. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S2104, the process proceeds to step S2105.

In step S2105, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and a combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol specified in step S2104 is obtained. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S2106.

In step S2106, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery for the current game round has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big win is determined based on the received variation command. In step S2106, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery for the current game round has been won (S2106: YES), the process proceeds to step S2107.

In step S2107, the information of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is stored. Specifically, the setting contents in the effect setting process of step S2103 are stored. This processing is performed to reproduce the effect in the game round in which the big winning lottery is won. After executing step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2112. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2106 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won (S2106: NO), the process proceeds to step S2112 without executing step S2107.

If it is determined in step S2102 that the sound/light side condition establishment flag is ON (S2102: YES), the process proceeds to step S2108. That is, when it is determined that the process corresponding to case a2 described in FIG. 9 is to be executed, the process advances to step S2108.

In step S2108, the information of the effect type, stop pattern, and variable display pattern stored in step S2107 of the effect setting process related to the previous game round is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S2109.

In step S2109, the setting processing of the effect type is executed based on the information of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern read out in step S2108. That is, the same effect as the effect executed in the previous game round is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S2110.

In step S2110, a stop design setting process is executed based on the information of the effect type, the stop design, and the variable display pattern read out in step S2108. That is, the stop symbols having the same content as the stop symbols displayed in the previous game round are set. After that, the process proceeds to step S2111.

In step S2111, a variable display pattern setting process is executed based on the information of the effect type, stop pattern, and variable display pattern read out in step S2108. That is, a variable display pattern having the same contents as the variable display pattern displayed in the previous game round is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S2112.

In step S2112, the information of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step S2113 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S2113, the process proceeds to step S2114, and after executing update processing at the time of fluctuation start, the effect setting processing ends. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 32: S2114).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2201 that the command for variation received this time is the first command for variation (S2201: YES), the process advances to step S2202 to count the first pending number counter stored in the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. Subtract 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S2204.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that the variation command received this time is not the first variation command (S2201: NO), the flow advances to step S2203, and the second pending number stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 Decrease the counter by 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S2204.

In step S2204, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is ended.

<Opening effect setting processing>
Next, the opening effect setting process will be described. The opening effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 29: S1806).

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the opening effect setting process. In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2301 that the sound and light side condition establishment flag is not ON (S2301: NO), the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, a normal start effect is set as an opening effect. In this embodiment, as explained in case a2 of FIG. 9, as the opening effect in the special game state, an opening effect such as a specific start effect (see FIG. 10(c)) which is executed only in special cases is prepared. are doing. In step S2302, a start effect (ordinary start effect) to be executed except for a special case such as case a2 is set as an opening effect. After executing step S2302, the process advances to step S2305.

If it is determined in step S2301 that the sound and light side condition establishment flag is ON (S2301: YES), the process proceeds to step S2303. In step S2303, a specific start effect is set as an opening effect. After executing step S2303, the process advances to step S2304 to turn off the sound and light side condition establishment flag. After that, the process advances to step S2305.

In step S2305, an opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU102. The opening effect command includes information on the opening effect set in step S2302 or step S2303. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received opening effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S2305, the opening effect setting process is terminated.

<Ending production setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 29: S1813).

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the ending effect setting process. In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the sound and light effect duplication flag is ON. In step S2401, when it is determined that the sound and light effect duplication flag is not ON (S2401: NO), the process proceeds to step S2402.

In step S2402, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side condition establishment flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2402 that the sound/light side condition establishment flag is not ON (S2402: NO), the process proceeds to step S2403. That is, when it is determined to execute the effect (suggestion effect, special game state reproduction effect and specific end effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game round of case a1 in FIG. move on.

In step S2403, the information of the effect type, stop pattern, and variable display pattern stored in step S2107 of the effect setting process (FIG. 32) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S2404.

In step S2404, a special game state reproduction effect is constructed from the information read out in step S2403. After that, the process advances to step S2405 to set a suggestion effect, a special game state reproduction effect, and a specific end effect as an ending effect. That is, the effect to be executed in the ending period in the special game state after the first game round in case a1 of FIG. 9 is set. After that, the process advances to step S2409.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2402 that the sound/light side condition establishment flag is ON (S2402: YES), the process proceeds to step S2406. That is, when it is determined to execute the effect (suggestive effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game round of case a2 in FIG. 9, the process proceeds to step S2406.

In step S2406, the suggestive effect is set as the ending effect. After that, the process advances to step S2409.

In step S2401, when it is determined that the sound and light effect duplication flag is ON (S2401: YES), the process proceeds to step S2407. That is, when it is determined to execute the effect (normal ending effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the second game round of case a2 in FIG. 9, the process proceeds to step S2407.

In step S2407, the normal ending effect is set as the ending effect. As described above, the normal ending effect is a effect suggesting the end of the special game state. After that, the process proceeds to step S2408.

In step S2408, the sound and light effect duplication flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S2409.

In step S2409, an ending effect command including information corresponding to the effect content set in step S2405, step S2406 or step S2407 is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect content corresponding to the received ending effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S2409, this ending effect setting process is terminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, as shown in steps S2403 to S2405 and S2409, the effect type executed in the first game round, the stop pattern, and the variation display pattern are shown. When the information is stored by the sound emission control device 90 and the special game state reproduction effect is executed, the command indicating the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game round is part of the ending command. , the symbol display device 41 is caused to display an image corresponding to the special game state reproduction effect. Specifically, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives a command indicating the type of effect executed in the first game cycle, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern as part of the ending command from the sound emission control device 90, it receives The pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern indicated by the given command is read out from the program ROM 103 and written in the work RAM 104 . The pattern data table is necessary to display an image of one frame at the timing of updating the image when a moving image corresponding to the effect for the current game round is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. It is an information group for which various processing is defined. That is, in the pattern data table, a group of information corresponding to each frame from the start timing to the end timing of the effect for the current game cycle is defined.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the information group corresponding to each frame, and gives a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 in order to display an image for one frame. The VDP 105 reads an image from the character ROM 106 in accordance with the drawing instruction from the MPU 102, generates image data to be displayed on the display surface 41a in the video RAM 107, and outputs the generated image data to the pattern display device 41 to display the image. An image of one frame is displayed on the surface 41a. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 sequentially instructs the VDP 105 to draw the information group of each frame stored in the pattern data table, thereby displaying the effect type and stop pattern executed in the first game round. , the variable display pattern can be executed as a special game state reproduction effect.

In the present embodiment, the special game state reproduction effect is executed by executing the above processing. process may be adopted. For example, as in the present embodiment, the display from the sound emission control device 90 instead of the processing of storing the information indicating the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game round in the sound emission control device 90 A command is transmitted to the control device 100 to instruct to temporarily store a pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the performance type, the stop pattern, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game cycle. According to the command, the display control device 100 temporarily stores a pattern data table corresponding to a combination of the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern executed in the first game cycle.

After that, when the special game state reproduction effect is to be executed, a command is output from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 to instruct the VDP 105 to draw according to the temporarily stored pattern data table. . According to the command, the display control device 100 can execute a special game state reproduction effect by instructing the VDP 105 to draw according to the temporarily stored pattern data table. As described above, various processes can be adopted in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the processing for executing the special game state reproduction effect.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S2501, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process advances to step S2502.

In step S2502, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S2601, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S2701, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 37) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S2701), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step S2702, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S2701), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S2702), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process advances to step S2704.

In step S2704, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S2703), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process advances to step S2705, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the case a1, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is lost, the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed after the suggestion effect. And the result notification effect is executed as a special game state reproducing effect for reproducing the effect executed in the first game round, and the player also recognizes that the effect is for reproducing the already executed effect. On the other hand, as in case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the advance notice effect, the ready-to-win effect and the result notification effect which are executed after the suggestion effect have already been executed in terms of effect. However, in reality, it is a game round reproduction effect executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. When the player has previously viewed the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1, the player executes the game cycle reproduction effect in the second game cycle of the case a2 in the first game cycle in the same manner as in the case a1. As well as recognizing that it is merely a reproduction of the performance shown in the previous game, it is difficult to anticipate winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. In such a state, after the announcement effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed in the second game round, when the player is informed that he or she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round by the result notification effect. At that time, for the first time, the notice effect, reach effect, and result notification effect executed in the second game round are not merely reproductions of the effects executed in the first game round, but the second game. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the time. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game cycle reproduction effect in the case a2 in this way, the game is given a sense of surprise, and at least part of the effect executed in the first game cycle is reproduced. A sense of expectation can be imparted to the player for the performance to be performed. In addition, by making the second game round in case a2 develop unexpectedly by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the case of case a2, although the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round, it suggests reproducing the advance notice effect, ready-to-win effect, and result notification effect executed in the first game round. Since the suggestive effect is executed, it is even more difficult for the player to anticipate winning the big winning lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game.

Further, in the case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the ready-to-win effect executed after the suggestive effect is executed as a reproduction of the already executed effect in terms of the effect, but in reality. is executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, when it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation regarding the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, when it is executed as a reproduction of the effect that has already been executed, At least three cases are set such that the performance is executed as a reproduction of the performance that has already been executed, but in reality it is executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

B. Second embodiment:
FIG. 39 is a time chart explaining the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the case a2 shown in FIG. 9B of the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round, and the first game round The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the second game round and the second game round are consecutive has been described.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as case b1 shown in FIG. A process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when there is another game round (hereinafter also referred to as a preceding game round) between the first game round and the second game round will be described. In addition, the jackpot lottery in the preceding game round is out.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect. After executing the ready-to-win performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification performance for notifying the player of the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the first game cycle. In the first game round, a big win is announced as a result announcement effect.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. In the special game state, an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode and an ending effect are executed. In this embodiment, in the special game state after the first game round, the opening effect is the opening effect (normal opening effect) that suggests the beginning of the special game state, and the ending effect is the end of the special game state. Ending production (normal ending production) is executed. That is, as in the case a2 of FIG. 9B, the suggestion effect is not executed as the ending effect of the special game state.

When the special game state ends, the preceding game round is executed. In this embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game round.

FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the symbol display device 41 when the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game round. As shown in the figure, when the suggestive effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL. Then, in the display area 41aS, the variable display and stop display of the symbols are executed. Specifically, within the unit game time, the variable display of the symbols is executed during the variable time, and the stop display of the symbols is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, a suggestion effect is executed. In this way, by displaying the variable display and the stop display of the symbols in a small area of the display surface 41a, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect without making the player feel uncomfortable in the preceding game round. Further, the variable display and static display of the symbols may not be displayed on the display surface 41a, or the predetermined marks and characters displayed in synchronization with the variable display and static display of the symbols may be displayed blinking and lit. . Even in this way, the suggestive effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort in the preceding game round.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round after executing the preceding game round. As described above, in the example shown in case b1 of FIG. 39(a), the jackpot lottery is won even in the second game cycle. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game round reproduction production for reproducing the production executed in the first game round as the production in the second game round. That is, the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect (jackpot notification) executed in the first game round are executed. In this case, this result notification effect (jackpot notification) has a function as a part of the game round reproduction effect, and has a function as a result notification for the big win lottery in the second game round. Then, the second game round ends when the game round reproduction effect ends.

Since the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state after the second game round ends. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start performance in the opening performance of the special game state. The specific start performance is executed as the opening performance of the subsequent special game state when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game round is won and the game round reproduction performance is executed in the second game round.

The second embodiment can be implemented, for example, by the processing described below.

When the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, similar to the processing executed in the first embodiment (Fig. 32: S2107), the effect executed in the first game round Effect, ready-to-reach effect, and result notification effect) are stored. The contents to be stored are not limited to the effect itself executed in the first game round, and may be other information as long as it is information capable of specifying the effect executed in the first game round. That is, information indicating the type (pattern) of the effect executed in the first game round, the address information of the memory storing the effect executed in the first game round, etc. The effect executed in the first game round can be called again.

After memorizing the performance executed in the first game round, the game round (second game round) to be executed after the first game round and winning the jackpot lottery is specified by the preceding determination processing. Then, the advance notice effect, the ready-to-win effect and the result notification effect in the first game cycle stored are executed as the game cycle reproduction effect in the second game cycle. At that time, for example, by setting the variation time to be the same for all game rounds in which the jackpot lottery is won, the ready-to-win effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game round are changed to the second game round. It can be executed within the variable time in the game round.

In addition, when there is a preceding game round between the first game round and the second game round, this embodiment is realized by executing a suggestive effect according to the fluctuation time of each preceding game round. can do. In addition, when there are a plurality of preceding game rounds, a suggestive effect corresponding to each variation time may be executed in each preceding game round, for example, the preceding game round executed immediately before the second game round The suggestive effect may be executed only in , and the normal effect may be executed in the other preceding game times.

Also, the number of preceding game rounds is not limited to one. An upper limit value may be set for the number of game rounds allowed as preceding game rounds between the second game round.

FIG. 39(b) is a time chart illustrating an example of processing when there are a plurality of consecutive preceding game rounds between the first game round and the second game round. As shown in the figure, for example, after winning the jackpot lottery in the first game round, if there are five or less preceding game rounds in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out (Fig. 39 (b )), after that, in the second game round that wins the jackpot lottery, the game round reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game round is executed, and the number of preceding game rounds is 6 or more. (not shown), the game round reproduction effect may not be executed in the second game round in which the jackpot lottery is won after that. As for the processing, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the effect executed in the first game round (this embodiment , the notice effect, ready-to-win effect and result notification effect) are stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 .

Further, a preceding game round counter for counting the number of preceding game rounds between the first game round and the second game round is provided, and when determining the performance of the second game round for winning the jackpot lottery, It is determined whether the counter value of the preceding game counter is 5 or less or 6 or more. When the counter value is 5 or less, the effect executed in the first game round is read out from the sound and light side RAM 94, and in the second game round, the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced. A reproduction performance is executed, and when the counter value is 6 or more, a normal jackpot performance is executed in the second game cycle. By doing so, the present embodiment can be realized even when there are a plurality of preceding game times. In addition, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game round. Specifically, the previous determination process specifies the preceding game round immediately before the second game round, and determines to execute the suggestive effect in the preceding game round. Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time of the preceding game round is determined, the suggestive effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of the preceding game round is selected and executed. By doing so, even if there are a plurality of consecutive preceding game rounds between the first game round and the second game round, the game round reproduction effect can be executed. can. In this description, if there are 6 or more preceding game rounds in which the jackpot lottery lottery results are out of the preceding game rounds after the first game round in which the jackpot lottery is won, After that, the game round reproduction performance is not executed in the second game round in which the jackpot lottery is won, but the number (threshold value) of the preceding game rounds for determining that the game round reproduction performance is not executed is limited to 6. can be set to any number.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, even if there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round, the other game round is By executing the suggestive effect in each round, the suggestive effect and the game cycle reproduction effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, even if there are a plurality of other game rounds (preceding game rounds) between the first game round and the second game round, a suggestive effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of each preceding game round is provided. By executing it, the game round reproduction effect can be executed in the second game round without giving the player a sense of incompatibility.

C. Third embodiment:
FIG. 41 is a time chart for explaining the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, at least part of the effect executed in the game round before the first game round (Fig. 41: first preceding game round) is reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect and the game round reproduction effect. At the same time, a case of reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game cycle will be described. In this description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described using two cases, case c1 and case c2, as examples.

FIG. 41(a) shows, as a case c1, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is lost in the second game round executed after the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 shows the processing performed by . As shown in the figure, before the first game round in which the big win lottery is won, there is a first preceding game round in which the lottery results of the big win lottery are lost.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), in case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game round and the first game round. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is a effect that foretells that the jackpot lottery will be won in the first game cycle. After executing the continuous performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification performance for notifying the player of the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a big win is announced as a result announcement effect.

Incidentally, the result notification effect in the first preceding game round when the continuous effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 40 described above. . Specifically, within the unit game time, the variable display of the symbols is executed during the variable time, and the stop display of the symbols is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, continuous effects are executed. By doing so, a series of continuous effects can be executed from the first preceding game round to the first game round without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), after executing the result announcement effect (jackpot announcement) in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in a special game state.

The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion performance, a special game state reproduction performance, and a specific end performance during the ending period. In this embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and the result notification effect (jackpot announcement) in the first game time are reproduced. do. In addition, when the variable display and the stop display of the symbols are reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a when the special game state reproduction effect is executed are actually displayed in the first game round. The content of the design is partly different.

The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific end performance after executing a special game state reproduction performance. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. The jackpot lottery related to the second game round is lost. The pachinko machine 10 executes a normal notice effect and a result notice effect (loss notice) in the second game round.

Next, case c2 shown in FIG. 41(b) will be described. In case c2, as in case c1, there is a first preceding game round in which the lottery result of the big win lottery is lost before the first game round in which the big win lottery is won. Furthermore, in the case c2, before the second game round in which the big win lottery is won, there is a second preceding game round in which the lottery results of the big win lottery are lost.

Similar to case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game round and the first game round. After executing the continuous performance, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification performance for notifying the player of the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the first game round. In the first game round, a big win is announced as a result announcement effect.

After executing the result notification effect (jackpot notification) in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in a special game state.

In the case of case c2, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestion effect during the ending period. Then, the game round reproduction performance is executed over the second preceding game round and the second game round. In case c2, as the game round reproduction effect, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game round to the first game round and the result notification effect (jackpot announcement) in the first game round are executed.

After finishing the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start performance in the opening performance of the special game state. After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening/closing execution mode and the ending effect. In the special game state after the second game round, the normal ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

The third embodiment can be implemented, for example, by the following specific processing.

In this embodiment, the RAM 96 always stores the effects executed in the already executed four game rounds. Then, every time a prize is awarded to the first start port 33, the result of the big winning lottery in the game round executed by the prize is grasped by the preceding determination processing.

When it is grasped that the result of the jackpot lottery of the first game round is a jackpot as a result of the preceding determination processing, the jackpot lottery of the first preceding game round held one before the first game round is grasped. If the result is a loss, the continuous performance is executed over the first preceding game round and the first game round.

Then, when there are two or more reserved game rounds after the first game round before the first game round is finished, the results of the jackpot lottery for the two game rounds are grasped by the preceding determination processing, If the results of the jackpot lottery for the two game rounds are consecutive failures, case c1 is executed. That is, the suggestive effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game round.

Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the first game round among the two game rounds is a loss, and the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round to be executed later is a jackpot, case c2 is executed. . That is, the suggestive effect is executed in the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game round, and the game round reproduction effect is executed in the second preceding game round and the second game round.

In the case c2, when the second preceding game round does not exist, that is, when the jackpot lottery in the game round executed after the special game state after the first game round is a jackpot, the second game round , the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time may be executed as the game time reproduction effect. In this case, if the variation time of the second game cycle is shorter than the time required to reproduce the entire continuous effect, only a part of the continuous effect may be reproduced.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, even if continuous effects are executed from the game round before the first game round to the first game round, Also, the continuous effect can be reproduced as a special game state reproduction effect and a game cycle reproduction effect. In addition, by using the processing of case c1 and case c2 together, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the continuous effect.

D. Fourth embodiment:
FIG. 42 is a time chart for explaining the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the effect executed in the first game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is lost is executed as the game round reproduction effect in the second game round executed after the first game round. In this description, two cases, case d1 and case d2, are used as examples to describe the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

FIG. 42(a) shows, as case d1, when the jackpot lottery is lost in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round executed after the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates the processing to be executed. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a ready-to-win effect in the first game round. The ready-to-win production performed in this case is a production that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the ready-to-win performance, the pachinko machine 10 performs a loss notification in the result notification performance.

After executing the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a game round reproduction effect, and a result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as the suggestive effect, an effect suggesting that the effect executed in the first game round be reproduced, and as the game round reproducing effect, the advance notice effect and reach executed in the first game round. perform the performance. Also, as a result notification effect, a big hit notification is performed.

After executing the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start performance as an opening performance. Also, as the ending effect, a normal ending effect is executed.

Next, case d2 will be described. In the case d2, as shown in FIG. 42(b), the big winning lottery is lost in the first game round, and the big winning lottery is lost in the second game round executed after the first game round. , shows the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, in the first game round, the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed. The ready-to-win production performed in this case is a production that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the ready-to-win performance, the pachinko machine 10 performs a loss notification in the result notification performance.

After executing the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a game round reproduction effect, and a result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as the suggestive effect, an effect suggesting that the effect executed in the first game round be reproduced, and as the game round reproducing effect, the advance notice effect and reach executed in the first game round. perform the performance. In addition, as a result notification effect, a failure notification is performed.

The fourth embodiment can be implemented, for example, by the following specific processing.

The propriety of the jackpot lottery related to the reserved game round is determined by executing the preceding determination process every time the winning to the first start port 33 occurs. Then, when it is specified that the jackpot lottery is won in the game rounds that are held two or more ahead, the game round that wins the jackpot lottery (corresponds to the second game round in case d1). In the game round (corresponding to the first game round) reserved one before (corresponding to the first game round), the notice performance and the ready-to-win performance are executed, and the executed notice performance and ready-to-win performance are stored. As described above, the information to be stored is not limited to the data of the executed advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect itself, and may be other information as long as the executed notice effect and ready-to-win effect can be read again. good.

The pachinko machine 10 executes a ready-to-win performance in the first game round, and then performs a loss notification as a result notification performance. After that, in the second game round, the suggestion performance is executed, and the stored advance notice performance and ready-to-win performance are executed as the game round reproduction performance. Further, the specific start effect executed in the special game state after the second game round is realized by executing the same processing as the opening effect setting process performed by the sound emission control device 90 in the first embodiment. be able to. Case d1 in the fourth embodiment can be realized by executing such processing.

Further, case d2 is executed first of the two pending game rounds when there are two consecutive game rounds in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out by executing the first determination process. It can be realized by executing the ready-to-win effect in the first game round, and reproducing the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect executed in the previous game time as the suggestive effect and the game time reproduction effect in the game time to be executed later. . In this case, in the second game round, the fluctuation time of the second game round is shorter than the time required to execute all of the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect in the first game round as the game round reproduction effect. In this case, for example, part or all of the advance notice effect to be executed as the game repeat reproduction effect may be omitted according to the variation time of the second game cycle.

On the other hand, in the second game round, when the fluctuation time of the second game round is longer than the time required to execute all of the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect in the first game round as the game round reproduction effect. , for example, the execution time of the suggestive effect may be extended according to the variation time of the second game cycle. By preparing a plurality of types of suggestive performances corresponding to the time required for the performance and selecting the optimum suggestive performance according to the variation time of the second game cycle, the suggestive performance and the play cycle reproduction performance are required. time and the variable time of the second game cycle can be made the same.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, by executing the process of case d1, even though the jackpot lottery for the second game round has been won, Since the performance executed in the first game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss is executed in the second game round as the game round reproduction performance, the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won. It is difficult to make the player expect that. In addition, by executing a suggestive effect suggesting reproduction of the effect in the first game round in which the jackpot lottery was lost before executing the game round reproduction effect, in the second game round, the first game can be reproduced. It is possible to further give the player the perception that the effect executed in the round is merely reproduced. Then, the player can be made to recognize that he or she has won the big winning lottery related to the second game round only after the notification means notifies the lottery result of the big winning lottery related to the second game round, thereby making the game unexpected. You can give it character. In other words, by making the second game turn unanticipated by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by executing the process of case d2, in addition to the case where the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, even when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is lost, Since the game round reproduction performance is executed, the player can be given recognition that the lottery result of the big win lottery related to the game round in which the game round reproduction performance is executed is not always a big win. As a result, when the game round reproduction performance is executed, the player is given an uplifting mood and a sense of anticipation, and the player's attention to the game round in which the already executed performance is reproduced is improved. be able to.

E. Fifth embodiment (an example of processing for setting the effect type):
Next, as a fifth embodiment, an example of processing executed in the effect type setting processing (FIG. 32: S2103) described in the first embodiment will be described. The effect type setting process is a process of setting the contents of the effect to be executed in the game round in the sound emission control device 90 (sound and light side MPU 92). In this description, first, an overview of the effect type setting process executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 in this embodiment will be described. After that, the details of the processing will be explained using a flowchart.

FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the effect type setting process. When the effect type setting processing is started, the sound and light side MPU 92 executes the display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, and the display pattern random number counter for object C in order to determine the details of the announcement effect. A counter value is acquired at a predetermined timing from each random number counter of C13.

Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a random number counter used for determining how to combine a plurality of object images that constitute the advance notice effect in each game round. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter value is updated at short intervals. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

In this embodiment, the advance notice effect in each game round is configured by combining three types of object images. The display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, and the display pattern random number counter C13 for object C are random numbers for determining the display modes of these three types of object images. In the effect type setting process, the method of combining these three types of object images, the arrangement position on the display surface 41a, and the timing of display are determined, and set as an advance notice effect. Here, three types of object images that constitute the preview effect in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an object A, which is an object image that constitutes the advance notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object A shows the behavior of a character representing a person, and is composed of three images, image A1, image A2, and image A3. 44(a) shows the image A1, FIG. 44(b) shows the image A2, and FIG. 44(c) shows the image A3. The object A may be displayed as an image that changes with time by displaying at least two images of the three images A1, A2, and A3 in a predetermined order, that is, as a moving object image. In some cases, one of the three images A1, A2, and A3 is displayed as a still image by continuously displaying for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an object B, which is an object image that constitutes the advance notice effect. As illustrated, the object B shows how the weather changes, and is composed of three images, an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3. 45(a) shows the image B1, FIG. 45(b) shows the image B2, and FIG. 45(c) shows the image B3. The object B may be displayed as an image that changes with time by displaying at least two images of the three images B1, B2, and B3 in a predetermined order, that is, as a moving object image. In some cases, one of the images B1, B2, and B3 is displayed as a still image by continuously displaying for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing an object C, which is an object image that constitutes the advance notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object C shows the movement of the dog in the box, and is composed of three images C1, C2 and C3. 46(a) shows the image C1, FIG. 46(b) shows the image C2, and FIG. 46(c) shows the image C3. The object C may be displayed as an image that changes with time by displaying at least two images of the three images C1, C2, and C3 in a predetermined order, that is, as a moving object image. In some cases, one of the images C1, C2, and C3 is displayed as a still image by continuously displaying for a predetermined period of time.

As described above, in the effect type setting processing in this embodiment, the three types of object images (objects A to C) described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 are combined to set the advance notice effect.

The description returns to FIG. After acquiring the counter values from the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13, the sound and light side MPU 92 refers to the object A display pattern table, the object B display pattern table, and the object C display pattern table, and sets each display pattern random number counter. Each counter value obtained from C11 to C13 is compared to determine a display pattern for each object.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for object A as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for object A shows a case where the result of the big win lottery is a big win, a case where the result of the big win lottery is a loss and a ready-to-win effect is to be executed (“loss (with reach)”), and a big win. If the result of the lottery is out and the reach effect is not executed ("out (no reach)"), it is classified into three cases.And for each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter of 0 to 99 and , and display patterns.In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, as the display pattern of object A, a pattern in which object A is not displayed (non-display) and a pattern in which only image A1 is displayed ( A1), a pattern (A1-A2) for displaying images A1 and A2 in order, and a pattern (A1-A2-A3) for displaying images A1, A2 and A3 in order are preset.

When setting the notice effect for a predetermined game round, the sound and light side MPU 92 confirms whether the game round corresponds to a big hit, a loss (with reach), or a loss (without reach). Then, of the display pattern table, the part corresponding to the game round is referred to. For example, if the game round is a jackpot, the "jackpot" column of the display pattern table is referred to. Then, the display pattern is determined by comparing with the obtained value of the display pattern random number counter C11.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the present embodiment, the method of allocating the random number value to each display pattern is different for each of the cases of big win, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). For example, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is the frequency displayed when the jackpot, the frequency displayed when the failure (with reach), and the frequency displayed when the failure (no reach) different from That is, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) has a higher probability of being displayed in the order of big win, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). Conversely, the display pattern (A1) has a higher probability of being displayed in the order of failure (no reach), failure (with reach), and big win. Therefore, in the announcement effect in the game round, the probability that the display pattern (A1-A2) is displayed is higher than the case where the display pattern (A1) is displayed, and the display pattern (A1-A2) is higher. It is set so that the probability of a big win is higher when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed than when is displayed. That is, the effect by the object A indicates to the player the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game by suggesting the probability of a big win in the game round, and the degree of expectation of the big win to the player (hereinafter referred to as the degree of expectation). It functions as a step-up effect that indicates (also called).

In the present embodiment, the display pattern tables for each of object A, object B, and object C have different ways of distributing random number values in each case of big win, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). The degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the step-up performance of the object A, the degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the step-up performance of the object B, and the degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the step-up performance of the object C are different. For example, in the case of object B, the value of the display pattern random number in the display pattern for object B is changed so that it is not displayed in the game round in the case of loss (no reach), but is displayed in the case of loss (with reach) and a big win. It may be distributed. Specifically, in the display pattern for the object B, it can be realized by setting "non-display" in all the cases of the display pattern random numbers 0 to 99 in the case of the deviation (no reach). In this way, the degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the object A when the object B is not displayed can be made different from the degree of expectation for the big prize when the object A and the object B are displayed. That is, in the display pattern tables for each of object A, object B, and object C, by setting differently how to distribute the random number value in each case of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), In addition to the step-up mode of each object image, the presence or absence of display of each object can also express the degree of expectation for a big win. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the object image.

In the present embodiment, the display pattern tables for each of object A, object B, and object C are divided into three cases: jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). However, for example, the classification of the jackpot in the display pattern table of object B is further divided into 16R variable variable jackpot, 8R variable variable jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot. You may make it function as step-up production|presentation which shows degree. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine that has a latent variable probability state (a game state in which the player does not recognize that the lottery mode is a high probability mode), the effect of the object C is set to the degree of expectation of the variable probability state of the current game round. It may be made to function as a step-up production showing . In this way, if the objects A, B, and C have the function of suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game by the display pattern, each object can be of a different type (for example, expected jackpot or The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game, such as the degree of expectation for the probability variable jackpot, may be indicated.

As shown in FIG. 43, after determining display patterns for object A, object B, and object C, the sound and light side MPU 92 arranges each object in order to combine each object and display them on the display surface 41a. Set the position and timing of each object's display. Specifically, the sound and light side MPU 92 refers to a preset placement/timing setting table to determine the placement position and display timing of each object.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement/timing setting table. As shown in the figure, the placement/timing setting table contains the display objects decided to be displayed, the coordinates of the placement position of each object to be displayed on the display surface 41a, and the display start of each object on the display surface 41a. are set in association with each other. The display pattern determined in the process using the random number counter is, for example, a display pattern for object A (A1-A2), a display pattern for object B (non-display), and a display pattern for object C (C1-C2- In the case of C3), the objects to be displayed are object A and object C, so reference is made to "A and C" in the left column of the placement/timing setting table. In this case, as shown in the middle column of the placement/timing setting table, the placement coordinates of object A and object C are such that the center coordinates of object A are located at (Xa2, Ya2) on the display surface 41a. , and the object C is set so that the center coordinates of the object C are positioned at (Xc1, Yc1) on the display surface 41a. Furthermore, in this case, as shown in the right column of the arrangement/timing setting table, the display of object A starts ta2 seconds after the start of the game cycle, and the display of object C starts after the game cycle starts. It is set to start displaying after tc1 second.

Although the coordinates indicating the placement of each object in the placement/timing setting table of FIG. 48 are set as fixed coordinates, the placement position (coordinates) of each object may be set to change over time. That is, a dynamic trajectory of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes over time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner having relevance, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period is The placement and display start timings of the display objects are set in the placement/timing setting table so that they do not overlap each other.

In this embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the display surface 41a is displayed in a manner in which the relative positions of the objects are considered and the objects are associated with each other. , the placement of display objects (relative placement positions between objects) and display start timing (relative timing between objects) are set in the placement/timing setting table. Furthermore, the placement and display start timing of the display objects in the placement/timing setting table are set so that the objects displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period do not overlap each other.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an announcement effect in which a plurality of object images are combined. The example in FIG. 49 shows a case where the coordinates indicating the placement of each object in the placement/timing setting table in FIG. 48 change over time. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 49(a), 49(b), and 49(c). FIG. 49 shows a preview effect in which object A, object B, and object C are combined. Object A is displayed in a display pattern (A1-A2-A3), and object B is displayed in a display pattern (B1-B2 -B3) is displayed, and for object C, the advance notice effect is set such that the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed.

In the preview effect shown in FIG. 49, there is a story in which a person walking on a sunny day finds a box, notices that there is a dog inside the box while the weather is getting worse, and gives the dog an umbrella. expressed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative positions of the objects are taken into consideration, and the objects are associated with each other. Furthermore, the placement and display start timing of the display objects in the placement/timing setting table are set so that the display objects are displayed on the display surface 41a in a narrative manner. By doing so, it is possible to make the announcement effect that is executed by displaying a plurality of types of object images during the same period be a effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and to add a narrative to the game. Interest can be improved.

In the example shown in FIG. 49(c), the object A is displayed on the display surface 41a without an image frame indicating the area of the object image. Specifically, object A is composed of a layer image of an image frame and a layer image showing a character representing a person, and processing to display only the layer image showing a character representing a person. is running. By doing so, it is possible to create an effect in which a plurality of object images are displayed that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In FIG. 49, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is subjected to the process of not displaying the image frame. A configuration may be adopted in which the image frames of some or all of the images A2 and A3 are not displayed. Also, similar processing may be performed on other object images.

The sound and light side MPU 92 thus sets the arrangement position of each object and the timing of displaying each object, and sets the advance notice effect.

Next, the processing for setting the effect type described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing processing for setting the effect type. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 32: S2103).

In step S2801, a counter value is obtained from each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13. After that, the process advances to step S2802 to confirm whether the game round for which the notice effect is to be set is a jackpot, a loss (with reach), or a loss (without reach). After executing step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2803.

In step S2803, each display pattern table for objects A to C is referenced to determine the display pattern of each object. After that, the process advances to step S2804.

In step S2804, when the display pattern is set for each object, it is determined whether or not there is no object display in the advance notice effect of the game round. That is, it is determined whether or not the display patterns of all objects A to C are "non-display".

In step S2804, if it is determined that there is no object display (non-display) in the advance notice effect in the game round (S2804: NO), the process proceeds to step S2805, and the placement/timing setting table is referred to and displayed. The coordinates of the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a and the timing of starting display on the display surface 41a are determined. After that, the process advances to step S2806.

On the other hand, in step S2804, when it is determined that the object display is absent (non-display) in the advance notice effect of the game round (S2804: YES), the process proceeds to step S2806 without executing step S2805.

In step S2806, a notice effect is set. Specifically, the determined display objects, the coordinates of the arrangement positions of each object on the display surface 41a, and the timing of starting the display of each object are set in the advance notice effect in the game round. After that, the process proceeds to step S2807.

In step S2807, it is determined whether or not the game round is a big win or a loss (with reach). That is, it is determined whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect after executing the advance notice effect in the game round.

In step S2807, when it is determined that the game round is a jackpot or a loss (with reach) (S2807: YES), the process advances to step S2808 to execute reach effect setting processing. After that, the process advances to step S2809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2807 that the game round is not a big hit or a loss (with reach) (S2807: NO), the process proceeds to step S2809 without executing step S2808.

In step S2809, the advance notice effect and ready-to-win effect set in steps S2806 and S2808 are set as effect commands. After that, the processing for setting the effect type is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a mutually related manner when displayed in the same period as the advance notice effect. The performance executed by being displayed during the period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the performance can be improved. Each object may or may not be displayed at the same time as other objects (that is, when each object is displayed alone). A production can be executed, and an object can be effectively used.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 49, when a plurality of object images are displayed in the same period, each object image is displayed in a manner having a story in relation to each other. It is possible to make the performance executed by being displayed into a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the effect executed by displaying a plurality of object images in the same period has a narrative, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display pattern tables for each of object A, object B, and object C have different ways of distributing random numbers in each case of big win, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). The degree of advantage/disadvantage in the game and the degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the step-up effects of the object images of object A, object B, and object C are different from each other. That is, even when each object is displayed, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game differs depending on whether other objects are also displayed during the same period. You can improve your expectations.

Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, depending on the setting of the display pattern table, for example, the classification of the jackpot in the display pattern table of the object B is 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot By classifying the jackpot, the effect by the object B can be made to function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the variable probability big win. That is, the effects of each object can be made to function as effects indicating the degree of advantage/disadvantage of different types of games. Therefore, each object can be used to indicate the degree of advantage/disadvantage in various types of games.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when each object image is displayed in the same period, the relative positions of the objects are displayed on the display surface 41a at predetermined arrangement positions. A plurality of objects displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Specifically, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative position between each object is taken into consideration, and the arrangement and timing are adjusted so that each object is related. The arrangement of display objects and the timing of starting display are set in the setting table. Also, the placement and display start timing of the display objects in the placement/timing setting table are set so that the objects displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period do not overlap each other. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, since each object image may be displayed during the same period or may not be displayed during the same period (that is, when each object is displayed alone), multiple effects are executed using each object image. It is possible to effectively utilize the object image.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. ) may be displayed in three different display modes. Corresponding to each display mode, relative positions with respect to other object images (object B, object C) are displayed on the display surface 41a in a predetermined arrangement. Therefore, various effects using each object image can be executed. Further, according to each of a plurality of different display modes (display patterns), each object image is displayed on the display surface 41a at a predetermined relative position among the object images. No images are superimposed and displayed without any relevance. Therefore, various effects that are executed by displaying the respective object images in the same period do not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effects can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 48, the timing at which each object starts to be displayed on the display surface 41a is set in advance by the layout/timing setting table. Therefore, when the object images are displayed in the same period, the object images are displayed at relatively predetermined timings, so that the object images are displayed at unrelated timings. never. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying each object image in the same period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, each object image is an image that changes over time (moving image in this embodiment), so various effects can be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the jackpot lottery when object A is displayed as the advance notice effect, the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery when object B is displayed as the notice effect, and object C The probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery when is displayed as the advance notice effect is different. Furthermore, the probability of winning a big win in a big win lottery when each object image is combined and displayed as an advance notice effect is also different. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the object image.

F. Sixth embodiment (another example of processing for setting effect types):
Next, another example of the effect type setting process (FIG. 32: S2103) will be described as a sixth embodiment. As described above, the effect type setting processing is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game round in the sound emission control device 90 (sound and light side MPU 92). In this description, first, an overview of the effect type setting process executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 in this embodiment will be described. After that, the details of the processing will be explained using a flowchart.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an overview of the effect type setting process in the sixth embodiment. The difference between this embodiment and the above-described fifth embodiment is the method of determining the type of object to be displayed as the advance notice effect. In the fifth embodiment, the combination of objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect is determined by the display pattern random number and the display pattern table prepared for each object.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a combination of multiple types of objects to be displayed in the announcement effect is set in advance by the display object table, and the sound and light side MPU 92 acquires the counter value from the display object random number counter C21 and displays it. By collating with the object table, a combination of objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect is determined.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the arrangement position and display start timing of the objects displayed in the preview effect are determined by the arrangement/timing setting table. The arrangement position and display start timing of each object are set in advance corresponding to the display pattern of . A specific description will be given below.

When the effect type setting process is started, the sound and light side MPU 92 acquires a counter value from the display object random number counter C21 at a predetermined timing. The display object random number counter C21 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display object random number counter C21 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

After acquiring the counter value from the display object random number counter C21, the sound and light side MPU 92 refers to the display object table, executes collation with the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21, and determines the object to be displayed in the announcement effect. Decide on a combination.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a display object table. As shown, in the display object table, the counter value of the display object random number counter C21 and the combination of each object to be displayed as the advance notice effect are set in association with each other. For example, when the acquired value of the display object random number counter C21 is 75, the object A and the object C are set as the object images displayed in the announcement effect. The display object table according to the present embodiment differs in the method of allocating display object random number values (the number of values to be allocated) for each combination of objects displayed as the advance notice effect. For example, when only object A is displayed as a display object, display object random number values range from 0 to 19, and 20 values are assigned. Display object random number values when object A and object B are displayed are 60 to 71, and 12 values are assigned. When object A, object B, and object C are displayed, display object random number values range from 96 to 99, and four values are assigned. In this way, the number of display object random number values assigned to each combination of objects is different, so that the combination of each object is displayed differently as the advance notice effect.

The description returns to FIG. After determining the combination of objects to be displayed in the announcement effect, the sound and light side MPU 92 acquires a counter value from the display pattern random number counter C22 at a predetermined timing. The display pattern random number counter C22 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display pattern random number counter C22 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

After acquiring the counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22, the sound and light side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table corresponding to the previously determined combination of display objects, and compares it with the acquired counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22. to determine a display pattern corresponding to the combination of display objects. FIG. 51 shows a case where it is determined by the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table that object A and object C are to be displayed as a combination of objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect. In this case, the sound and light side MPU 92 refers to the AC display pattern table as the display pattern table.

FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an AC display pattern table as an example of the display pattern table. As shown, the AC display pattern table is divided into three cases: big win, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). For each case, the values of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 and the display pattern of the effect using the object A and the object C are set in association with each other.

In this embodiment, as a display pattern using object A and object C, a pattern (non-display) in which neither object A nor object C is displayed, and an image A1 of object A and an image C1 of object C are combined. Display pattern (A1/C1), pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2) for displaying image A1 and image A2 of object A in order and displaying image C1 and image C2 of object C (A1-A2/C1-C2), image of object A A display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3) is set in which A1 and image A2 are displayed in order and image C1, image C2 and image C3 of object C are displayed in order. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a and the timing of starting display of each object are set in advance for each display pattern. The placement position and display start timing are determined.

For example, when the game round is a jackpot, and it is determined by the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table that object A and object C are to be displayed as a combination of objects to be displayed in the advance notice effect. , when the counter value obtained by the display pattern random number counter C22 is "62", the display pattern of the announcement effect is determined as (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3).

FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing an advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3) is set as an example of the display pattern. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 54(a), 54(b), and 54(c). As shown in the drawing, in the advance notice effect, the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A are displayed in order, and the image C1 and the image C2 of the object C are displayed in order on the display surface 41a. As described above, the display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3) includes the arrangement positions and display start timings of the images A1 and A2 of the object A, and the display start timings of the images C1, C2, and C3 of the object C. Since the arrangement position and display start timing are set in advance, the mode of the advance notice effect is determined by determining the display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3).

Although the display pattern table for AC has been described in FIG. 53, a display pattern table is prepared for each combination of objects. In addition, a plurality of types of display patterns are set for each display pattern table by combining images of respective objects.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing an A display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for A, in the three cases of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), respectively, non-display, display pattern (A1), display pattern (A1-A2), display pattern (A1 -A2-A3) (see FIG. 44) are allocated. As shown in the figure, in the display pattern table for A, the display pattern (A1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns in the case of failure (no reach), and in the case of failure (with reach) In the above four display patterns, the display pattern (A1-A2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is the most displayed among the four display patterns. Values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the display pattern random number counter C22 so as to increase the display frequency. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, the player will be more likely to see the image A2 displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image A1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, expectations for winning the big winning lottery have increased, and the big winning lottery is more likely to occur when the image A3 is displayed on the display surface 41a after that than when the image A2 is displayed after the image A1 on the display surface 41a. High hopes for winning.

Next, the display pattern table for B will be described.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for B. FIG. In the case of the display pattern table for B, in the three cases of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), respectively, non-display, display pattern (B1-B2-B3), display pattern (B1-B2), Four display patterns of display pattern (B1) (see FIG. 45) are allocated. As shown in the figure, in the display pattern table for B, the frequency of displaying the display pattern (B1-B2-B3) among the above four display patterns is the highest in the case of failure (no reach). Yes), the display pattern (B1-B2) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns, and in the case of a big win, the display pattern (B1) is the most displayed among the four display patterns. Values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the display pattern random number counter C22 so as to increase the display frequency. That is, by allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, unlike the advance notice effect by the object A described above, the player can, after the image B1 is displayed on the display surface 41a, When the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is lowered, and the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a after the image B1 than when the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a. When the image B3 is displayed, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is lowered.

Next, the display pattern table for C will be explained.

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a C display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for C, in the three cases of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), non-display, display pattern (C1), display pattern (C1-C2), display pattern (C1 -C2-C3) (see FIG. 46) are allocated. As shown in the figure, in the case of outage (no reach), the display pattern (C1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and in the case of outage (with reach), the above four displays Among the patterns, the display pattern (C1-C2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big win, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns. , values of 0 to 99 are assigned to the display pattern random number counter C22. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, the player will be more likely to see the image C2 displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, expectations for winning the big winning lottery have increased, and the big winning lottery is more likely to be won when the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a after that than when the image C2 is displayed after the image C1 on the display surface 41a. High hopes for the election.

Next, the display pattern table for AB will be explained.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing an AB display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for AB, in the three cases of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), non-display, display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3), display pattern (A1 -A2-A3/B1) and four display patterns (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) are allocated. As shown in the figure, in the display pattern table for AB, the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) among the four display patterns is most frequently displayed in the case of deviation (no reach). , In the case of outliers (with reach), the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the above four display patterns are displayed. A display pattern random number counter C22 value of 0 to 99 is assigned so that the pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) is most frequently displayed.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 59(a), FIG. 59(b), and FIG. 59(c). As shown in the figure, the forewarning effect expresses a state in which a walking person gets wet in the rain while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy to rainy.

When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 59(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and generally gives a bad impression. Since it does not give, the player does not have a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. After that, when an image consisting of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 59B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which the person has noticed that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy. 59(a), giving the player an impression that it is generally not good compared to the image shown in FIG. gives an indescribable recognition. When an image composed of the image A2 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 59(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person getting wet in the rain, which generally gives a bad impression. To give a player an unfavorable perception of a game situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) changes the player's recognition of the game situation to a disadvantageous recognition as the display of the notice effect progresses.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1) is set by the AB display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 60(a), FIG. 60(b), and FIG. 60(c). As shown in the drawing, the forewarning effect expresses a walking person noticing that it is sunny and holding an umbrella to prevent sunburn.

When an image composed of images A1 and B1 shown in FIG. 60A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and generally gives a bad impression. Since it does not give, the player does not have a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. After that, when the image composed of the image A2 and the image B1 shown in FIG. As with the image in FIG. 60(a), it generally does not give a bad impression, and therefore does not give the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A3 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 60(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a person holding an umbrella to prevent sunburn, which is generally bad. It does not give an impression and gives a not unfavorable perception of the playing situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1) gives the player a recognition that it is difficult to determine whether the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous even if the display of the notice effect progresses.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 61(a), FIG. 61(b), and FIG. 61(c). As shown in the figure, the forewarning effect shows that the weather changes from sunny to cloudy to rainy, and the person walking notices the change in weather, puts up an umbrella, and is able to appropriately respond to the deterioration of the weather. is expressed.

When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 61(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and generally gives a bad impression. Since it does not give, the player does not have a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 61(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the person has noticed that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy. 61(a) and generally gives an impression that it cannot be said to be good compared to the image shown in FIG. 61(a). Gives a recognition that can not be said. After that, when an image composed of the image A3 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 61(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person who was able to appropriately cope with the deterioration of the weather by holding an umbrella. It gives a generally good impression and gives a favorable perception of the playing situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) gives the player a recognition that the game situation is not disadvantageous in the image of FIG. In the image of FIG. 61(b), the player is given recognition that is not considered advantageous regarding the game situation, and then in the image of FIG. 61(c), the player is given the recognition that is advantageous regarding the game situation. . By displaying such an announcement effect, it is possible to give the player's sense of anticipation for the game an intonation.

As shown in FIGS. 59, 60, and 61, the effects set by the AB display pattern table allow the player to recognize that the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous as the advance notice effect progresses. configured to give In particular, when comparing the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) explained in FIG. 59 and the notice effect by (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) explained in FIG. , FIG. 59(a) and FIG. 61(a) are the same image, and FIG. 59(b) and FIG. 61(b) are the same image. , the player can be given a sense of urgency as to which of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 59 and the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 61 will be changed. More specifically, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency when the person who notices the change in the weather decides whether or not to put up an umbrella at the end. It is possible to improve and improve the interest of the game.

Next, the BC display pattern table will be described.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a BC display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for BC, in the three cases of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), respectively, non-display, display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3), display pattern (B2-B3 /C1-C3) and four display patterns (B1/C1-C2-C3) are allocated. As shown in the figure, in the BC display pattern table, the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed in the case of failure (no reach). In the case of (with reach), the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) is displayed most frequently among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, among the above four display patterns, the display pattern ( A display pattern random number counter C22 value of 0 to 99 is assigned so that B1/C1-C2-C3) is most frequently displayed.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 63(a), FIG. 63(b), and FIG. 63(c). As shown in the figure, the forewarning effect expresses that while the weather changes from cloudy to rainy, the dog pokes its head out of the box and gets wet in the rain.

When an image consisting of image B2 and image C1 shown in FIG. 63(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state where a box is placed in the cloudy weather. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. Images also do not give the player an adverse perception of the game situation. However, when an image consisting of images B3 and C3 shown in FIG. 63(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a after that, the image shows a dog getting wet in the rain with its head out of the box. is expressed, generally giving a bad impression and giving the player an unfavorable perception of the playing situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) gives the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation when the image of FIG. 63(c) is displayed.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3/C1) is set by the BC display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 64(a), FIG. 64(b), and FIG. 64(c). As shown in the figure, the forewarning effect expresses a state in which the weather changes from cloudy to rainy, and the box is placed in such weather.

When an image consisting of images B1 and C1 shown in FIG. 64(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which a box is placed in cloudy weather. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. Images also do not give the player an adverse perception of the game situation. Then, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 64(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image does not change from the image shown in FIG. Do not give anyone a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. Thus, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3/C1) does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (B1/C1-C2-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The advance notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 65(a), FIG. 65(b), and FIG. 65(c). As shown in the figure, the forewarning effect expresses a dog coming out of a box on a sunny day.

When an image consisting of images B1 and C1 shown in FIG. 65(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a box placed on a sunny day. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. After that, when an image consisting of images B1 and C2 shown in FIG. 65(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a dog sticking its head out of the box on a sunny day. 65(a), giving the player an advantageous perception of the game situation. When the notice effect is set according to the display pattern table for C in FIG. 65(a) to FIG. 65(b), the image of object C changes from image C1 to image C2. provide an advantageous perception of the playing situation. After that, when an image composed of the image B1 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 65(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a dog with a large face sticking out of the box on a sunny day. It gives the player an advantageous perception of the playing situation because it generally gives a good impression. In this way, the effect by the display pattern (B1/C1-C2-C3) is similar to the announcement effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. Since an image giving a bad impression is not displayed, the player can be given an advantageous recognition of the game situation as the advance notice effect progresses.

Here, among the effects set by the BC display pattern table, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) shown in FIG. 63 and the display pattern (B2-B3/C1 - A comparison with the advance notice effect by C3) will be described.

These two preview effects are the same image up to the middle image. Specifically, FIGS. 63(a) and 64(a) are the same image, and FIGS. 63(b) and 64(b) are the same image. Therefore, even if either of the two advance notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the game situation given to the player is the same until the middle. However, depending on the image displayed after that, the player's perception of the game situation is greatly different between these two advance notice effects. The image in FIG. 63(c) is an image in which the image C3 is combined with the image B3, and an image of a dog getting wet in the rain generally gives a bad impression. give an unfavorable perception of On the other hand, the image of FIG. 64(c) is an image in which the image C1 is combined with the image B3, and the image of the box placed in the rain does not give a bad impression. On the other hand, do not give unfavorable recognition about the game situation. In other words, in a state in which an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed, if the image C1 changes to the image C3 after that, the image is shown in FIG. is given an unfavorable perception of the game situation, and on the other hand, in a state in which an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed, if the image C1 does not change after that, Since the image is shown in FIG. 64(c), the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. Therefore, by executing the notice effect shown in FIG. 63 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 64 and displaying an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined, whether or not the image C1 changes to the image C3 is the game. It is possible to attract the attention of other players and to give the player a sense of urgency.

In the advance notice effect based on the display pattern table for C in FIG. 57, when the image of the object C is displayed without being combined with the image B3, the image C3 is displayed more than the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. is displayed on the display surface 41a, the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Specifically, an image depicting a dog peeking out from inside a box generally gives a better impression than an image depicting a box being placed. To provide a player with an advantageous perception of the game situation. Further, when the advance notice effect is set according to the display pattern table for C in FIG. When the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3, the player is more informed about the game situation than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3. Gives favorable recognition.

However, when the image B3 is combined with the image C1 and the image C3, when the image C1 is combined with the image B3 and displayed on the display surface 41a (FIG. 64(c)), the image C3 This provides the player with more advantageous recognition of the game situation than when it is combined with the image B1 and displayed on the display surface 41a (FIG. 63(c)).

That is, when the image B3 (image of rain) is not combined with each of the images C1 and C3, the image C3 (image of the inside of the box) is displayed more than when the image C1 (image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. Although the image of the dog) displayed on the display surface 41a gives the player more advantageous recognition of the game situation, the image B3 (the image of the rain) is added to each of the images C1 and C3. ), the image C1 (the image of the box) displayed on the display surface 41a is higher than the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) displayed on the display surface 41a. To give a player an advantageous perception of a game situation.

Therefore, depending on how the images are combined, it is possible to give the player various perceptions of the game situation. In the case of the present embodiment, when a predetermined image is combined with a performance image that steps up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery or the degree of expectation increases, the player will have a completely different recognition of the game situation. can be given to Even when the player recognizes the image C1 (image of a box) and the image C3 (image of a dog in a box) displayed on the display surface 41a, the player can determine whether or not the image B3 (image of rain) is displayed. It recognizes that the game situation differs depending on the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a.

Further, as described in the display pattern table for C in FIG. 57, in the case of the present embodiment, the image C3 (image C3) is displayed more than the image C1 (box image) is displayed without being combined with the image B3 (rain image). The image C1 (the image of the box) is displayed without combining the image B3 (the image of the rain) with the image B3 (the image of the rain). When the image is displayed in combination with the image B3 (image of rain), the winning lottery is higher than when the image C3 (image of a dog in a box) is displayed in combination with the image B3 (image of rain). There is a high probability that Therefore, when the image C1 (the image of the box) or the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) or the image of the object C or a part thereof is displayed, whether or not to display the image B3 (the image of rain) is determined. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player.

Normally, the effect image in which the probability of winning the jackpot lottery increases as the effect image progresses (for example, as the effect image progresses from image P1 to image P2 to image P3) is image P2 from image P1 and image P2 from image P2. P3 is configured to be an image that gives a better impression to the player. In other words, the images P1, P2, and P3 are configured so that the order of the probability of winning the jackpot lottery and the order of the impression given to the player are the same. With such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be improved as the effect image steps up (progresses). Displaying [image P1 + image Q], [image P2 + image Q], and [image P3 + image Q] by combining other images (for example, image Q) with such a normal effect image. Even so, [image P2 + image Q] is better than [image P1 + image Q], and [image P3 + image Q] is better than [image P2 + image Q]. configured to That is, when the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2, even if the image Q is simply combined, [image P2 + image Q] is more likely to give the player a better impression than [image P3 + image Q]. It is difficult to create an image that gives a good impression. In this embodiment, such a problem is solved by devising the content of the image displayed as the step-up effect image and the content of the combined image. In this embodiment, by devising the contents of the image P1, the image P2, the image P3, and the image Q, the image Q is combined even though the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2. In this case, [image P2+image Q] can give a better impression to the player than [image P3+image Q].

By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the following recognition to the player. That is, the effect image not combined with the image Q gives recognition that the game situation is more advantageous as the image P1→image P2→image P3 progresses. Q]→[image P2+image Q]→[image P3+image Q], it is possible to recognize that the game situation is more disadvantageous.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an ABC display pattern table. In the case of the ABC display pattern table, in the three cases of jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach), non-display and display patterns (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3 ), display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3), and display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3). there is As shown in the figure, in the ABC display pattern table, the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is the most out of the four display patterns in the case of deviation (no reach). The frequency of display is high, and in the case of outliers (with reach), the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3) is displayed most frequently among the above four display patterns, and the jackpot In the case of the above four display patterns, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is displayed most frequently, so that the display pattern of 0 to 99 The value of the random number counter C22 is assigned.

Next, the display pattern table for AC will be explained.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 67(a), FIG. 67(b), and FIG. 67(c). As shown in the figure, the preview effect expresses a person walking and a dog sticking its face out of the box getting wet in the rain while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy to rainy. there is

When an image composed of image A1, image B1, and image C1 shown in FIG. 67(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person and a box on a sunny day. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of image A2, image B2, and image C2 shown in FIG. 67B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows the weather changing from sunny to cloudy, and the person showing the change of weather. The image also shows a dog poking its head out of the box, and the image does not give the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. However, when an image composed of images A2, B3, and C3 shown in FIG. 67(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a after that, the image includes the person who noticed the change in weather and the person inside the box. A dog with its face sticking out from behind is shown getting wet in the rain, which generally gives a bad impression and gives the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) gives the player's expectation for the game an inflection, and at the end of the notice effect, the player , gives an unfavorable perception of the playing situation.

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The advance notice effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 68(a), 68(b), and 68(c). As shown in the figure, the advance notice effect expresses a person who notices the change in weather and a dog coming out of the box while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy.

When an image composed of image A1, image B1, and image C1 shown in FIG. 68(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a person walking on a sunny day and a box placed there. is expressed, and generally does not give a bad impression, so the player does not have a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of image A2, image B2, and image C2 shown in FIG. 68(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the weather changes from sunny to cloudy, and the change in the weather is noticed in the image. A person and a dog peeking out from inside the box are represented, and this image does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. When an image composed of images A2, B2, and C3 shown in FIG. 68(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a dog sticking its head out of the box are represented in cloudy conditions. , the image does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. Thus, the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3) does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the advance notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The advance notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 69(a), FIG. 69(b), and FIG. 69(c). As shown in the illustration, the preview effect expresses a scene where the person walking while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy to rainy, notices the change in the weather, and gives an umbrella to the dog that sticks its face out of the box. It is

When an image composed of the image A1, the image B1, and the image C1 shown in FIG. 69(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a person walking on a sunny day and a box placed there. is expressed, and generally does not give a bad impression, so the player does not have a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of image A2, image B2, and image C2 shown in FIG. 69(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the weather changes from sunny to cloudy. A person and a dog peeking out from inside the box are represented, and this image does not give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. Then, when an image consisting of images A3, B3, and C3 shown in FIG. 69(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, in the rain, a dog sticking its head out of the box and giving the dog an umbrella. Since the person to whom the offer is made is represented and the image generally gives a moving impression, it gives the player an advantageous perception of the game situation. Thus, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) gives the player an advantageous perception of the game situation.

Here, among the effects set by the ABC display pattern table, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. A comparison with the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) will be described.

These two preview effects are the same image up to the middle image. Specifically, FIG. 67(a) and FIG. 69(a) are the same image, and FIG. 67(b) and FIG. 69(b) are the same image. Therefore, even if either of the two advance notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the game situation given to the player is the same until the middle. However, depending on the image displayed after that, the player's perception of the game situation is greatly different between these two advance notice effects. The image in FIG. 67(c) is an image in which image A2, image B3, and image B3 are combined, and an image in which a person and a dog get wet in the rain generally gives a bad impression. On the other hand, it gives an unfavorable perception of the game situation. On the other hand, the image in FIG. 69(c) is an image in which image A3, image B3, and image C3 are combined, and is an image in which a person is holding an umbrella in the rain so that the dog does not get wet in the rain. is an image that gives a good impression, it gives the player an advantageous perception of the game situation. In other words, in a state in which an image in which image A2, image B2, and image C2 are combined is displayed, if image A2 does not change after that, the image is as shown in FIG. 67(c). , giving the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation, and on the other hand, in a state in which an image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined is displayed, the image A2 is changed to the image A3 after that. , the image is shown in FIG. 69(c), giving the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Therefore, by executing the notice effect shown in FIG. 67 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 69 and displaying an image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined, it is determined whether the image A2 changes to the image A3. This point can attract the player's attention and give the player a sense of urgency.

Further, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 69 has the following characteristics.

In the advance notice effect by the display pattern table for B shown in FIG. 56, as the effect image progresses from the image B1 to the image B2 to the image B3, the weather is getting worse, so the effect image progresses. As it does so, it gives the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. In addition, when the notice effect is set by the display pattern table for B in FIG. 56, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is set lower when the notice effect changes from the image B1 to the image B2 and then to the image B3. Therefore, as the image B1, image B2, and image B3 proceed, the player is given a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. That is, the object B gives the player a disadvantageous recognition by advancing the images in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3.

However, object B is combined with object A whose images progress in order of image A1, image A2, and image A3, and object C whose images progress in order of image C1, image C2, and image C3, and the display pattern (A1-A2- A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3), it is possible to change the effect image to a content that impresses the player, and to give the player an advantage in terms of the game situation. It can be changed to an image that gives recognition. As described above, each image configured as object A, object B, and object C in this embodiment can be displayed as one object or displayed in combination with other objects by devising the content of the image. Depending on the situation, the impression given by the image can be greatly changed, and the player's recognition of the game situation can be greatly changed.

Note that, in the present embodiment, an announcement effect by object A, object B, and object C, or an announcement effect consisting of a combination thereof, is used as an effect to suggest whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won. That is, these advance notice effects are used as effects indicating the degree of expectation for the big win, but they may be used as effects for indicating the degree of expectation for the probability variable jackpot or the degree of expectation for the probability variable state to the player. Also in this case, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous depending on how the images of the respective objects are combined.

Next, the processing for setting the effect type in the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the effect type setting process in the sixth embodiment. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 32: S2103).

In step S2901, a counter value is acquired from the display object random number counter C21. After that, the flow advances to step S2902 to refer to the display object table, execute collation with the obtained counter value of the display object random number counter C21, and determine the combination of objects to be displayed as the advance notice effect. After executing step S2902, the process advances to step S2903.

In step S2903, a counter value is obtained from the display pattern random number counter C22. After that, the process proceeds to step S2904, and it is confirmed whether the game round for which the notice effect is to be set is a jackpot, a loss (with reach), or a loss (without reach). After executing step S2904, the process advances to step S2905.

In step S2905, the display pattern table corresponding to the combination of objects to be displayed as the advance notice effect is referred to, and the obtained counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is collated to determine the display pattern. After that, the flow advances to step S2906 to set the decided display pattern as the announcement effect. After executing step S2906, the process advances to step S2907.

In step S2907, it is determined whether or not the game round is a jackpot. In step S2907, when it is determined that the game round is a jackpot (S2907: YES), the process proceeds to step S2908.

In step S2908, it is determined whether or not the display pattern of the advance notice effect set in step S2906 is the full display pattern. Here, the full display pattern means that the combination of objects displayed as the advance notice effect is three objects, object A, object B, and object C, and the display pattern is (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2- B3/C1-C2-C3). That is, it refers to the display pattern shown in FIG. When it is determined in step S2908 that the set display pattern of the notice effect is the full display pattern (S2908: YES), the process proceeds to step S2909.

In step S2909, as setting processing of the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-reach effect to be executed after the advance notice effect of the full display pattern is set to the sequel effect expressing the sequel of the effect expressed in the full display pattern.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sequel effect executed as a ready-to-win effect. The sequel effects are displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 71(a), FIG. 71(b), and FIG. 71(c). As illustrated, the sequel effect is a effect showing how a person walks in the rain with a dog under his/her umbrella. By executing such a sequel effect, it is possible to show the player that the probability of winning a big win is high, and to improve the player's sense of expectation.

The description returns to FIG. In step S2909, after the sequel effect is set as the ready-to-win effect, the process proceeds to step S2910.

If it is determined in step S2907 that the game round is not a big hit (S2907: NO), the process proceeds to step S2911.

In step S2911, it is determined whether or not the game round is reachable, that is, out (with reachable). When it is determined in step S2911 that the game round is reachable (S2911: YES), or when it is determined in step S2908 that the display pattern of the notice effect set is not the full display pattern (S2908: NO), The process advances to step S2912.

In step S2912, normal ready-to-win effect is set as setting processing for ready-to-win effect. The process then proceeds to step S2910.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2911 that the game round is not reachable (S2911: NO), the process proceeds to step S2910 without executing step S2912.

In step S2910, the notice effect set in step S2906 and the ready-to-win effect set in step S2909 are set as effect commands. After that, the effect type setting processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the player's recognition of the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation depending on how the objects are combined, so various effects using the objects are executed. It is possible to use each object image effectively. For example, even when the object A is displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the game situation is advantageous to the player depending on how it is combined with other objects or whether it is displayed in the same period as the other objects. Since the recognition of disadvantages is different, it is possible to execute various effects using each object image, and each object image can be effectively used. In addition, since the probability of winning the jackpot lottery when the display pattern is displayed differs for each of the various display patterns made up of combinations of object images, the degree of attention of the player to the effect constituted by each display pattern, It can improve interest and expectations.

Furthermore, when the object images are displayed in combination, a display pattern in which the relative arrangement position of each object is changed according to the game situation (for example, big win, loss (with reach), loss (without reach)) is set, it is possible to give the player various recognitions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game by adjusting the arrangement position. Furthermore, when displaying a combination of object images, a display pattern is set in which the timing at which the display of each object is started is changed according to the game situation. , the player can be given various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

G. Variant:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible.

G1. Variant 1:
In the first to fourth embodiments, the suggestive effect is executed before executing the special game state reproduction effect and the game cycle reproduction effect, but the suggestive effect is not limited to such a configuration. may be omitted. Even if the suggestive effect is omitted, at least one of the effects executed in the first game round in the second game round despite winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Since the effect of reproducing the part is executed, it is difficult for the player to expect that the big winning lottery related to the second game round has been won. In addition, even if the suggestive effect is omitted, by executing the game round reproduction effect due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game round, the player is surprised and the game is enhanced. It can add surprise.

G2. Modification 2:
In case a2 of the first embodiment and case c2 of the third embodiment described above, the suggestion effect is executed in the ending period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the second game round, the suggestive effect may be executed before the game round reproduction effect. That is, the suggestive effect can be executed at any timing as long as the timing is before reproducing the effect that has already been executed. Even if such a configuration is adopted, since the suggestive effect is executed before executing the special game state reproduction effect and the game round reproduction effect, for example, the effect executed in the second game round has already been performed. It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is a reproduction of the effect that has been executed.

G3. Variant 3:
In the first to fourth embodiments, the target of reproduction in the special game state reproduction effect and the game round reproduction effect is not limited to the effect executed in the big win game round. A performance executed in a game round that is not a jackpot, for example, a reach performance in a game round with a loss (with reach) may be the target of reproduction in a special game state reproduction performance and a game round reproduction production, or a game with a loss (no reach). The advance notice effect in each episode may be the object of reproduction.

G4. Variant 4:
The first game round and the second game round defined in the above-described first to fourth embodiments are not limited to two game rounds that are executed consecutively. For example, there may be another game round between the first game round and the second game round.

G5. Variant 5:
In the above-described first to third embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the effect to be executed in the ending period of the special game state is determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game round to be executed after the special game state. bottom. For example, in the first embodiment, the effect executed during the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game round is the suggestive effect and the special game state reproduction effect as shown in case a1 (FIG. 9). Alternatively, the suggestive effect as shown in case a2 is determined based on the special information relating to the second game round to be executed after the special game state, but it is not limited to such a configuration. The effect to be determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game round to be executed after the special game state is not limited to the suggestive effect or the special game state reproduction effect, and any other effect may be adopted. good too. For example, other effects such as normal ready-to-win effects (ready-to-win effects that are not subject to special game state reproduction effects) and effects that are executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be adopted. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to execute, in the special game state, an effect in consideration of the special information relating to the predetermined game round to be executed after the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect that is related to the effect to be executed in the predetermined game round, thereby improving the interest in the game.

G6. Modification 6:
The processes executed in the first to fourth embodiments may be used together. That is, case a1 (FIG. 9(a)) and case a2 (FIG. 9(b)) which are the processes executed in the first embodiment, and processes (FIGS. 39(a) and (b)) executed in the second embodiment. ), case c1 (FIG. 41(a)) and case c2 (FIG. 41(b)), which are processes executed in the third embodiment, and case d1 (FIG. 42(a)), which is a process executed in the fourth embodiment. )) and case d2 (FIG. 42(b)). This makes it possible to obtain a synergistic effect by the combined treatment. For example, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention and expectation for an effect that reproduces an effect that has already been executed, such as a special game state reproduction effect or a game cycle reproduction effect.

G7. Variant 7:
In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition and wins the jackpot lottery was explained as an example. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a case where a condition for executing a ready-to-win effect based on the acquired counter value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is satisfied may be adopted. Thus, even if other conditions are set as predetermined conditions, the same effects as those described in the first to sixth embodiments can be obtained.

G8. Modification 8:
In the above-described fifth and sixth embodiments, three types of images of objects A to C are used as the object images used for the advance notice effects, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, two types of object images or four types of object images may be used as the object images used for the announcement effect. In this way, even if an arbitrary number of object images are employed, the same effects as in the above embodiment can be obtained. Also, various contents can be adopted for the contents of each object.

G9. Modification 9:
In the above-described fifth and sixth embodiments, the degree of expectation for a big win is shown to the player as a game situation, depending on how the images of the respective objects displayed as the notice effect are combined. A configuration may be adopted in which various game situations are presented to the player as the game situation, such as the degree of probability and the degree of expectation that the current game state is a variable probability state.

G10. Modification 10:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in an example in FIG. 47, the display pattern table for each of object A, object B, and object C has three types: jackpot, loss (with reach), and loss (without reach). Each display pattern random number is distributed according to the case. The effect by the object B may function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the probability variable jackpot. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which a latent variable probability state exists, the effect by the object C may function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the variable probability state of the current game round. In this way, if the objects A, B, and C have the function of suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game by the display pattern, each object can be of a different type (for example, expected jackpot or The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game, such as the degree of expectation for the probability variable jackpot, may be indicated.

G11. Modification 11:
In the fifth embodiment, the coordinates indicating the placement of each object in the placement/timing setting table of FIG. 48 are set as fixed coordinates. may be That is, a dynamic trajectory of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes over time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner having relevance, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period is The placement and display start timings of the display objects are set in the placement/timing setting table so that they do not overlap each other.

G12. Variant 12:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is subjected to the process of not displaying the image frame. -A2-A3) may be configured such that the image frames of some or all of the images A1, A2, and A3 displayed as A2-A3) are not displayed. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which similar processing is executed for other object images.

G13. Variant 13:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to set the placement and display start timing for each combination of object images displayed as the advance notice effect by using the placement/timing setting table. However, other configurations may be employed. For example, in the announcement effect in which object A and object B are displayed, (A1-A2) and (B1-B2-B3) are combined, and (A1-A2-A3) and (B1) are combined. There are multiple types of advance notice effects, such as a notice effect. The layout and display start timing of each object image may be set for each of these multiple types of advance notice effects. By doing so, the effect executed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

G14. Variant 14:
In the above-described fifth and sixth embodiments, when two or more objects are displayed in one announcement effect, the relative positions of the objects are taken into consideration, and the relevance of each object is determined. In order to display on the display surface 41a in such a manner that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a, the relative arrangement position and display timing of each object are set. Specifically, it was set to be displayed in a narrative manner as a form of relevance, but set to be displayed in a manner in which multiple objects have a single idea as a form of relevance. Various aspects can be adopted as aspects in which a plurality of objects are associated, such as a configuration in which multiple objects are displayed according to a predetermined rule.

G15. Modification 15:
The display patterns set in the display pattern tables described in the fifth and sixth embodiments are not limited to the modes shown in the above embodiments, and other modes of display patterns may be adopted. can be done. For example, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) may be adopted as the display pattern set in the BC display pattern table. In this case, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing the appearance of a dog sticking out of the box, giving the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous. On the other hand, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object B is a display pattern showing how the dog in the box gets wet due to bad weather. It is possible to give the player the recognition that the situation is unfavorable, and it is possible to execute various effects by combining each object, so that the objects can be used effectively.

G16. Variant 16:
In the sixth embodiment described above, the image used for the preview effect is the object A, the object B, the object C, or a combination of these images, but other images may be used.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing an object D that can be used for an advance notice effect. The object D is composed of three images, an image D1, an image D2, and an image D3, and is an image that changes with time in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3. FIG. 72(a) shows the image D1, FIG. 72(b) shows the image D2, and FIG. 72(c) shows the image D3. As illustrated, object D expresses a love pattern between a male character and a female character. Specifically, the image D1 depicts a male character and a female character gazing at each other with a certain distance between them. Image D2 depicts a male character and a female character gazing at each other from a short distance. Image D3 shows a male character and a female character holding hands and getting along. Image D3 depicts a female character telling a male character that they are on good terms, keeping it a secret from the female character's father.

The object D, which is composed of images with such contents, depicts how a man and woman fall in love as the images progress in the order of image D1, image D2, and image D3. Image D3 generally gives a better impression than image D2. That is, the image D2 rather than the image D1 and the image D3 rather than the image D2 give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Further, the object D is displayed on the display surface 41a as a step-up effect image which is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery increases as the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3 progress. That is, the pachinko machine in Modification 16 is provided with a display pattern table for D as a display pattern table. (D1), display pattern (D1-D2), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3) are allocated. In the display pattern table for D, the display pattern display pattern (D1) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns in the case of failure (no reach), and the display pattern (D1) is displayed most frequently in the case of failure (with reach). Of the four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big win, the display pattern (D1-D2-D3) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns. Values of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 are assigned so as to increase.

The pachinko machine in this modified example further executes a notice effect in which an image E is combined with the object D as another image.

FIG. 73 shows an image (object D+image E) in which image E is combined with object D. FIG. As shown, image E, which is the image to be combined with object D, represents the female character's father. Object D+Image E is composed of three images, [Image D1+Image E], [Image D2+Image E], and [Image D3+Image E], and is composed of [Image D1+Image E], [Image D2+Image E], and [Image D3+image E] are images that change with time. 73(a) shows [image D1+image E], FIG. 72(b) shows [image D2+image E], and FIG. 72(c) shows [image D3+image E]. As shown, object D+image E shows the female character's father watching the romance between the male and female characters from behind a pillar. Specifically, in [Image D1 + Image E], a male character and a female character are gazing at each other with a certain distance, and the female character's father is watching from behind a pillar. It is [Image D2+Image E] shows a male character and a female character staring at each other at a short distance, while the female character's father is watching from behind a pillar. In [Image D3 + Image E], a male character and a female character hold hands, and the female character tells the male character that they are on good terms without telling the female character's father. The appearance of the female character's father watching from the shadow of the pillar is expressed.

The object D+image E, which is composed of images with such contents, progresses in the order of [image D1+image E], [image D2+image E], and [image D3+image E]. It is presumed that the parent-child relationship deteriorates. Therefore, as the images progress in the order of [image D1+image E], [image D2+image E], and [image D3+image E], a bad impression is generally given. In other words, [image D2+image E] generally gives a better impression than [image D3+image E], and [image D1+image E] gives a better impression than [image D2+image E]. That is, [image D2+image E] rather than [image D3+image E] and [image D1+image E] rather than [image D2+image E] give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation.

In addition, object D+image E is displayed as an effect image that is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery decreases as it progresses through [image D1+image E], [image D2+image E], and [image D3+image E]. It is displayed on the surface 41a. That is, the pachinko machine in Modification 16 is provided with a display pattern table for DE as a display pattern table. (D1/E), display pattern (D1-D2/E), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3/E) are allocated. In the DE display pattern table, among the above four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2-D3/E) is most frequently displayed in the case of failure (no reach). In the case of the above four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2/E) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big win, the display pattern (D1/E) is the most displayed among the above four display patterns. A value of 0 to 99 is assigned to the display pattern random number counter C22 so as to increase the frequency of display patterns.

By doing so, an effect similar to that of the sixth embodiment can be obtained. That is, in the pachinko machine according to the modified example, the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E, rather than the image D1 is displayed without being combined with the image E on the display surface 41a. Image D3 is displayed in combination with image E in the case where image D1 is combined with image E and displayed on display surface 41a in spite of giving the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. It is possible to give the player more advantageous recognition of the game situation than when it is displayed on the surface 41a. Therefore, by devising the combination of images and the contents of the images, it is possible to give the player various recognitions of the game situation.

Also, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E than when the image D1 is displayed without being combined with the image E. Although the image D1 is combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a, the jackpot lottery is higher than the case where the image D3 is combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a. There is a high probability that you will be elected to Therefore, when a predetermined image is combined with a performance image that steps up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery or the degree of expectation increases, the player can be given a completely different perception of the game situation. can. Even when the player recognizes the image D1 and the image D3 displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes that the game situation differs depending on whether or not the image E is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a. Although the above effect has been described by taking the relationship between the image D1 and the image D3 as an example, the above effect can also be obtained between the image D1 and the image D2, and between the image D2 and the image D3.

G17. Variant 17:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on the effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

H. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
The feature group A is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature A1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game round;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means (MPU 62, MPU 92 and MPU 102 in the first to fourth embodiments)
When the special information related to the second game round executed after the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition,
In the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced (the process of case a2 in the first embodiment, the process in the second embodiment, the case in the third embodiment). c2 process and case d1 process in the fourth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature A1, in spite of the fact that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, in the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to anticipate that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. After that, the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game round is notified by the notification means, and the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. can add surprise to In other words, by making the second game turn unanticipated by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1, further comprising:
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state in which a privilege is given to the player after a game round related to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition;
The production executing means is
In a first case where the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition,
After the start of the special game state executed after the first game round and before the start of the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced. (executing the processing of case a1 in the first embodiment and the processing of case c1 in the third embodiment),
In a second case where the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition,
In the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced (the process of case a2 in the first embodiment, the process in the second embodiment, the case in the third embodiment). Execute the process of c2)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature A2, when the special information relating to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced by reproducing the already executed effect. It functions as a role to reproduce, and the player recognizes it as such. On the other hand, when the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is a reproduction of the effect that has already been executed. However, in reality, it is executed because the special information related to the second game cycle satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, after the reproduction is executed in the second game round, when the informing means notifies that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the second game round is executed for the first time at that time. The reproduction executed in the game round does not simply reproduce at least part of the effect executed in the first game round, but is caused by the fact that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. The player recognizes that it is executed as Therefore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game and to give the player a sense of anticipation for the reproduction of the effect that has already been executed.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The production executing means is
When at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is to be reproduced, a suggestive effect suggesting to reproduce the effect that has already been executed before the reproduction (first embodiment) to the suggestion performance executed in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature A3, since the suggestive effect is executed before reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game round, the effect executed in the second game round is the first game. It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is at least part of the performance executed in the round. Thereafter, the result of the determination of the special information relating to the second game round is notified by the notifying means, and the player is made to recognize that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. Further, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to feature A3,
The production executing means is
If there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round,
The suggestive effect is executed in the other game round (in the second embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game round).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature A4, even if there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round, the suggestive effect is executed by executing the suggestive effect in the other game round. and reproduction can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game round before the first game round, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game round. part (performs the processing of case c1 and the processing of case c2 in the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature A5, even when the continuous performance is executed over the first game cycle from the game cycle before the first game cycle, the continuous performance can be reproduced. .

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to the player,
A game machine, wherein the object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a ready-to-win effect, which is a effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature A6, when the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, the ready-to-win effect executed after the suggestive effect is, in terms of effect, the effect executed in the first game round. Although it is executed as at least a partial reproduction, it is actually executed because the special information relating to the second game cycle satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, as a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is met, and a case where at least the effect executed in the first game cycle is executed. When it is executed as a partial reproduction, and in terms of performance, it is executed as at least a partial reproduction of the performance executed in the first game round, but in reality, the special information related to the game round is predetermined. At least three cases can be set, one being execution due to the fulfillment of the conditions. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

<Characteristic group B>
The feature group B is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature B1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game round;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
A game round (first to third embodiments) executed after a specific game round (first game round in the first to third embodiments) in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. a timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game round based on the special information relating to the second game round in the game machine.

According to the feature B1, the timing of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round is determined based on the special information related to the game round executed after the specific game round, so special In addition, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the reproduction, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
The production executing means is
The determination (step S1021) of whether or not the special information relating to the game round to be executed after the specific game round, which is the game round satisfying the predetermined condition, satisfies the predetermined condition is performed before the determination means (step S1021). and
Based on the result of the determination performed before the determination means, determine the timing of reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game round (execute the processing of steps S2102 to S2112)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature B2, by executing the determination of whether or not the special information related to the game round executed after the specific game round satisfies a predetermined condition before the determination means, the performance executed in the specific game round The effect in the game round to be executed prior to the game round determined to be reproduced at least partially can be determined in consideration of the game round to be reproduced. Therefore, for example, an effect related to the reproduction can be executed as an effect in the game round to be executed before the game round determined to be reproduced.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2,
The production executing means is
Of the game rounds executed after the specific game round, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 in the first embodiment, second in case c2 in the second and third embodiments). game round) to reproduce at least part of the effect executed in the specific game round.

According to the feature B3, at least a part of the performance executed in the specific game round is reproduced in the game round in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, so that at least a part of the production executed in the specific game round is reproduced. It is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the game round to be played satisfies a predetermined condition. The player is made to recognize that the special information related to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the game round is notified by a notification means, thereby imparting unexpectedness to the game. be able to. In other words, by making the game turn unanticipated by the player, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
The production executing means is
A game machine characterized in that, before reproducing at least a part of the performance executed in the specific game round, a suggestive performance suggesting reproduction of the performance already executed is executed.

According to the feature B4, since the suggestive effect suggesting the reproduction of the effect that has already been executed is executed, the player's attention and interest in the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round is increased. can be improved. In addition, when at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round is reproduced in the game round in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, by executing the suggestive effect, the game round in which the reproduction is further executed is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to anticipate that the special information related to .

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to feature B4,
The production executing means is
If there is another game round between the specific game round and the game round that reproduces at least part of the effect executed in the specific game round,
The suggestive effect is executed in the other game round (in the second embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game round).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature B5, even if there is another game round between the specific game round and the game round that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round, the suggestion is made in the other game round. By executing the effect, it is possible to reproduce at least a part of the suggestive effect and the effect executed in the specific game round without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature B6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
When the production execution means reproduces at least a part of the production executed in the specific game round,
The object to be reproduced by the effect execution means is the effect executed in the specific game round, and includes a ready-to-win effect which is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature B6, the ready-to-win effect, which was executed as reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round, was actually executed based on the special information related to the game round. By making the player recognize, it is possible to add surprise to the game. In addition, as a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is met, and a case where at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game round When it is executed as a reproduction, and in terms of performance, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the performance executed in a specific game round. At least three cases can be set, one being caused and the other being executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

<Characteristic group C>
The feature group C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature C1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game round;
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
When the special game state is executed, the effect to be executed in the special game state is determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game round executed after the special game state (first embodiment In case a1 and case a2, the second embodiment, and case c1 and case c2 in the third embodiment, the effect in the special game state after the first game round is determined by the propriety of the jackpot lottery in the second game round. Determine/S1201 to S1209, S2401 to S2409)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature C1, it is possible to execute, in the special game state, an effect in consideration of special information relating to a predetermined game round to be executed after the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect that is related to the effect to be executed in the predetermined game round, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
The production executing means is
In a first case where the special game state is executed and the special information relating to the predetermined game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, a predetermined effect is executed in the special game state. (In the case a1 in the first embodiment and the case c1 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the special game state after the first game round),
When the special game state is executed and the special information relating to the predetermined game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect is performed in the predetermined game round. Execute (In the case a2 in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the case c2 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the second game round)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the characteristic C2, when the special information relating to the predetermined game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect being executed in the special game state is performed when the special information relating to the predetermined game round satisfies the predetermined condition. In this case, the player can be made to recognize that the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed has a special meaning by executing it in the predetermined game round. Therefore, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined effect is a effect that reproduces at least part of the effect executed in the game round executed before the special game state.

According to the feature C3, even though the special information related to the predetermined game round satisfies the predetermined condition, at least the effect executed in the game round executed before the special game state in the predetermined game round Since a part of the information is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the predetermined game round satisfies the predetermined conditions. By making the player recognize that the special information related to the predetermined game round satisfies a predetermined condition only after the result of the determination of the special information related to the predetermined game round is reported by the reporting means, the game is given unexpectedness. can be granted. In other words, by making a predetermined game turn unanticipated by the player, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine according to feature C3,
When the game round executed before the special game state is defined as the first game round and the predetermined game round executed after the special game state is defined as the second game round,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes the effect executed by the effect executing means in the first game round when the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition (reproduced). In the case a1 and case a2 of the first embodiment, the case c1 and case c2 of the second embodiment, and the case c1 and case c2 of the third embodiment, the target effect is the first Including the effects executed in the game times)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature C4, when the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition, so that it is executed in the first game round. The performance is reproduced in the second game cycle. Therefore, only when the notifying means reports that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect executed in the first game round. However, in reality, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information relating to the second game round has been executed due to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, thereby imparting unexpectedness to the game. In addition, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and anticipation for the reproduction.

[Feature C5]
A gaming machine according to feature C3 or feature C4,
A game machine, wherein the object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a ready-to-win effect, which is a effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature C5, when the special information related to a predetermined game round (second game round) satisfies a predetermined condition, in the game round (first game round) executed before the special game state The executed ready-to-win performance is reproduced in the second game cycle. Therefore, in the second game round, the ready-to-win effect that was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game round that was executed before the special game state in terms of the effect is actually the second game. By making the player recognize that the special information relating to the game round has been executed due to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game. In addition, as a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting the degree of expectation of the satisfaction of the predetermined condition to the player, and a case where the game round executed before the special game state is executed. When it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the performance, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game round executed before the special game state, but in reality can set at least three cases, ie, a case where the special information relating to the game round is executed due to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

[Feature C6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C5,
The production executing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, before executing the predetermined effect, a suggestive effect suggesting the execution of the predetermined effect is executed.

According to feature C6, by executing a suggestive effect suggesting execution of the predetermined effect before executing the predetermined effect, the degree of attention of the player to the predetermined effect to be executed, It can improve interest.

[Feature C7]
The gaming machine according to feature C6,
The production executing means is
When the special game state is executed, the special information related to the predetermined game round satisfies the predetermined condition,
If there is another game round between the special game state and the predetermined game round,
The suggestive effect is executed in the other game round (in the second embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game round),
The predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined game round (in the second embodiment, the game round reproduction effect is executed in the second game round).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature C7, even if there is another game round between the special game state and the predetermined game round, the suggestive effect and the predetermined game round are executed by executing the suggestive effect in the other game round. A performance can be executed without giving a sense of incompatibility to a player.

[Feature C8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C7,
The game machine, wherein the object to be reproduced by the effect executing means is at least a part of the effect executed in at least two successive game rounds executed before the special game state.

According to the feature C8, even when the continuous performance is executed over at least two consecutive game rounds executed before the special game state, the continuous performance can be reproduced. can.

<Characteristic group D>
A group of features D is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature D1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game round;
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The special game state starting means is
Triggered by the fact that the special information relating to the second game round to be executed after the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition, a second special game state is started;
The production executing means is
The effect to be executed in the second special game state is determined based on the special information related to the first game round (in the first embodiment, the effect to be executed in the special game state is the first and the first game round of case a1 [corresponding to the second game round in the feature group]. , determine the effect to be executed in the special game state after the first game round [corresponding to the second game round in the feature group] [S2401, S2402, S2403 to S2405] / first game round of case a2 According to the relationship between [corresponding to the first game round in the feature group] and the second game round of case a2 [corresponding to the second game round in the feature group], the second game round [corresponding to the second game round in the feature group] Corresponding to the game round of 2] Determine the effect to be executed in the later special game state [S2401, S2407])
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature D1, the second special information to be executed after the second game round is considered in consideration of the special information of the first game round to be executed before the second game round in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to execute an effect in the game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a relationship between the special information relating to the first game round and the performance in the second special game state. can be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to feature D1,
When the second special game state is executed when the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition,
The production executing means is
When the special information related to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition (when the relationship between the first game round and the second game round in the case a2 of the first embodiment is established),
In the second game round (second game round of case a2 of the first embodiment), the performance executed in the first game round (first game round of case a2 of the first embodiment) reproduce at least a part (perform the processing of S2108 and S2109),
When the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition (the game round executed before the first game round in the case a1 of the first embodiment and the first game round in the case of the relationship),
In the second special game state (special game state after the first game round of case a1 of the first embodiment), in the second game round (first game round of case a1 of the first embodiment) Reproduce at least part of the executed effect (execute the processing of S2405)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature D2, in the second game round, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced in spite of the fact that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. . Therefore, it is difficult for the player to anticipate that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. By making the player recognize that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game round is notified by the notification means, the game is unexpectedly played. You can give it character. In other words, by making the second game turn unanticipated by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, when the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, in the second special game state, at least part of the effect executed in the second game round is reproduced. It is possible to satisfy the desire of the player to appreciate again the performance executed when the special information relating to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to feature D2,
The production executing means is
When reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game round in the second game round (the first game round and the second game round in case a2 of the first embodiment If there is a relationship), execute the first suggestive effect suggesting that the effect that has already been executed be reproduced (execute the processing of S2406) before the reproduction concerned,
When reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the second game round in the second special game state (the game round executed before the first game round in the case a1 of the first embodiment and the first game round), the second suggesting effect suggesting that the already executed effect is reproduced is executed before the reproduction (the process of S2405 is executed). )
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature D3, the first suggestive effect is executed before reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game round, and at least part of the effect executed in the second game round is reproduced. Since the second suggestive effect is executed before playing, for the reproduction of at least part of the effect executed in the first game round or the reproduction of at least part of the effect executed in the second game round, The degree of attention and interest of the player can be improved.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to feature D2 or D3,
The production executing means is
When reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game round in the second game round (the first game round and the second game round in case a2 of the first embodiment if relevant),
In the first special game state that is started when the special information related to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the first suggestive effect suggesting reproduction of the effect that has already been executed is executed (of S2406). process)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature D4, by executing in the first special game state an effect that suggests the content of the effect in the game time after the first special game state, the game time after the first special game state is completed It is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4,
A game machine, wherein the object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a ready-to-win effect, which is a effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature D5, the ready-to-win effect that was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round was actually caused by the special information related to the second game round. It is possible to add surprise to the game by making the player recognize that the game has been executed. Further, when at least part of the effect executed in the second game round is reproduced, the ready-to-win effect in the second game round is executed in the second special game state. It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to appreciate the ready-to-win performance again in the game round. Furthermore, as a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition will be met, and a case where it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect that has already been executed When it is executed, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect that has already been executed, but in reality, it is executed because the special information related to the game round meets a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

<Characteristic group E>
The feature group E is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature E1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game round;
Production execution means for executing production in each game round;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
When the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information related to the second game round executed after the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition. (In the case of case d1 in the fourth embodiment),
In the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced,
After execution of the effect in the first game round and before reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game round in the second game round, already executed A game machine characterized by executing a suggestive performance suggesting reproduction of the performance.

According to the feature E1, although the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the second game round. Since at least a part of the effect executed in the second game round is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. Further, by executing the suggestive effect before reproducing at least part of the effect executed in the first game round, in the second game round, at least the effect executed in the first game round It is possible to further give the player the recognition that only a part of the image is reproduced. Then, the game player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition only after the notification means notifies the determination result of the special information related to the second game round. can add surprise to In other words, by making the second game turn unanticipated by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1,
The production executing means is
In addition to the case where the special information relating to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition,
When the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition (case d2 in the fourth embodiment) )Also,
In the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced,
After execution of the effect in the first game round and before the reproduction in the second game round, a suggestive effect suggesting reproduction of the already executed effect is executed. game machine.

According to the feature E2, even if the special information related to the first game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the second game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since at least part of the performance performed in one game round is reproduced, the player can be given recognition that the special information related to the reproduced game round does not necessarily satisfy a predetermined condition. . As a result, when at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced, the player is given an uplifting mood and a sense of anticipation, and the player's impression of the game round in which the reproduction is executed. Attention can be improved.

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, further comprising:
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The production executing means is
When the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 in the first embodiment). for,
In the second game round, at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced,
A gaming machine characterized in that the suggestive effect is executed after the start of the special game state executed after the first game round and before the reproduction in the second game round.

According to the feature E3, when the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition, so that it is executed in the first game round. The performance is reproduced in the second game cycle. Therefore, only when the notifying means reports that the special information related to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect executed in the first game round. However, in reality, by making the player recognize that the special information relating to the second game round was executed due to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, it is possible to add surprise to the game. can. In addition, it is possible to improve the degree of attention, interest, and anticipation of the player for the reproduction of the effect. Furthermore, when at least part of the effect executed in the first game round is reproduced because the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, the player receives a privilege. is started, it is possible to further improve the expectation of the player for the reproduction of the effect.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to the player,
A game machine, wherein the object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes a ready-to-win effect, which is a effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature E4, when the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, the ready-to-win effect executed in the first game round is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, the ready-to-win effect, which was executed as reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game round in terms of the effect, is actually the fact that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Unexpectedness can be imparted to the game by making the player recognize that the game has been executed due to the above. In addition, as a case where the ready-to-win effect is executed, at least one of a case where it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is met and a case where the effect is executed in the first game cycle. In the case where it is executed as a reproduction of a part, and in terms of performance, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the performance executed in the first game round. At least three cases can be set, one being executed due to fulfillment. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, interest, and expectation for the ready-to-win effect.

[Feature E5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
The production executing means is
If there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round,
A gaming machine characterized in that the suggestive effect is executed in the other game round.

According to the feature E5, even if there is another game round between the first game round and the second game round, by executing the suggestive effect in the other game round, the suggestive effect and the The reproduction can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature E6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes at least part of the effect executed in the game round before the first game round and at least part of the effect executed in the first game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E6, even when continuous performance is executed from the game round before the first game round to the first game round, the continuous production can be reproduced. .

The inventions of the feature group A, feature group B, feature group C, feature group D, and feature group E solve the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art In a game machine such as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various game states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. These effects include, for example, effects that are executed with low frequency, such as ready-to-win effects that are executed with a low probability and effects that are executed only when a big win lottery is won. The effect that is executed with such a low frequency may sometimes be desired to be reproduced by the player for the purpose of appreciation after being executed once. Conventionally, in order to meet such demands of players, gaming machines are known that execute an effect that reproduces an effect that has been executed once.

Here, in the gaming machine as described above, there is a demand for further improvement in technology for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

<Feature group F>
The feature group F is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature F1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
an image display means for displaying an image as a production;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
A first image suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game to the player and different from the first image. is displayed on the image display means (object A, object B, and object C in the fifth and sixth embodiments are displayed on the display surface 41a),
The first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image or displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, it is displayed on the image display means in a manner related to the second image (in S2805 of the fifth embodiment). , by referring to the arrangement/timing table, each object is set and displayed in a manner having relevance/in S2905 of the sixth embodiment, each object is displayed in a manner having relevance display each object based on each display pattern table set to
A gaming machine characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art There are gaming machines that display an image on an image display means and execute an effect suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of a game to a player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. Also, these images are displayed under different conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap. A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting without considering the . As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a number of images may be superimposed and displayed, giving the player the impression that the presentation is complicated.

According to the feature F1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, it is displayed in a manner related to the second image. The effect executed by being displayed during the period (the same period) in which the second image overlaps does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, the first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image or in a period not overlapping with the second image. A rendering of the mode can be executed, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
A gaming machine, wherein the related aspect includes an aspect in which the first image and the second image are associated with each other and have a narrative.

According to the feature F2, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image and the second image are related and displayed in a manner having a story. Therefore, the effect that is executed by displaying the first image and the second image during the period in which the first image and the second image are overlapped (the same period) can be made to feel comfortable to the player. In addition, the effect that is executed by being displayed during the period in which the first image and the second image overlap each other has a narrative effect, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is
Different from the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when displayed during the period in which the first image and the second image overlap (fifth embodiment) S2803 in / S2905 in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature F3, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game differs depending on whether the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image or in a period not overlapping with the second image. Since it suggests, the first image can be used to perform a plurality of different modes of rendering, and the first image can be effectively used. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage or disadvantage differs depending on whether or not it is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with other images. , interest and expectations can be improved.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
The first image and the second image suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage of different types of games (process of S2803 of the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature F4, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage of various types of games using an image.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
The control means is
When the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. display and
A game machine, wherein when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

According to the feature F5, it is possible to make the effect of the first image and the second image feel comfortable to the player.

[Feature F6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time.

According to the feature F6, various effects can be executed by using an image that changes over time.

<Characteristic group G>
A group of features G is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature G1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
Expectation image storage means for storing an expectation image that is an image that changes over time;
image display means for displaying the expectation level image as a production;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The expectation degree image storage means
a first expectation image;
a second expectation image;
remember the
The control means is
When displaying the first degree-of-expectation image on the image display means;
a case where the second expectation image is displayed on the image display means;
A first partial image obtained by extracting an image that constitutes at least a partial period of the first expectation image in the time axis direction, and at least a partial period of the second expectation image in the time axis direction. displaying on the image display means a third expectation image, which is the expectation image obtained by combining the second partial image obtained by extracting the image to
there is
Define a probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the first degree of expectation image is displayed by the control means as a first probability,
A probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the second expectation image is displayed by the control means is defined as a second probability,
When the third probability is defined as the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the third expectation image is displayed by the control means,
The control means is configured such that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability,
Displaying the first expectation level image, the second expectation level image or the third expectation level image on the image display means (displaying using the display pattern table in the fifth embodiment/sixth embodiment) display using the display pattern table in
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature G1, as the expectation images displayed on the image display means, in addition to the first expectation image and the second expectation image, the first partial image and the second partial image have a relationship. Since the third expectation level image combined in the mode is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute an effect that effectively utilizes the first expectation level image and the second expectation level image. Since the third expectation level image is an expectation level image in which the first partial image and the second partial image are combined in a manner having relevance, it does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the effect is enhanced. quality can be improved. The image display means displays the first expectation image, the second expectation image, or the third expectation image such that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability. , the player's attention to the expectation degree image can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
The control means is
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, in a plurality of different display modes displaying a third degree of expectation image on the image display means;
The third probability is different for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation degree image (display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature G2, when extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, a plurality of different displays can be obtained. Since it is possible to display the third degree-of-expectation image on the image display means in various modes, it is possible to execute various effects using the third degree-of-expectation image. In addition, since the third probability differs for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation degree image, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the third expectation degree image and improve the amusement of the game. be able to.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2,
The control means is
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, in a plurality of different display modes displaying a third degree of expectation image on the image display means;
The relative display positions of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are:
It is set in advance for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation degree image (the arrangement position of each object is set in advance for each display pattern by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature G3, the relative display positions of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are different from the third expectation image. Since it is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not superimposed and displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image without any relation. Therefore, each effect using the third expectation level image in a plurality of different display modes does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
The control means is
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, in a plurality of different display modes displaying a third degree of expectation image on the image display means;
Relative display timings of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are different from the plurality of the third expectation images. It is set in advance for each display mode (the display timing of each object is set in advance for each display pattern by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature G4, the relative display timing of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is determined by a plurality of different third expectation images. Since it is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image as the third expectation degree image are not displayed on the image display means at unrelated timings. Therefore, each effect using the third expectation level image in a plurality of different display modes does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

<Characteristic group H>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature H1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
an image display means for displaying an image as a production;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
A first image suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game to the player and different from the first image. , is displayed on the image display means,
The first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image or displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, an arrangement position whose relative position is predetermined relative to the second image (arrangement/ A gaming machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at the arrangement position determined by the timing table/the arrangement position set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

2. Description of the Related Art There are gaming machines that display an image on an image display means and execute an effect suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of a game to a player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. Also, these images are displayed under different conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap. A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting without considering the . As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a number of images may be superimposed and displayed, giving the player the impression that the presentation is complicated.

According to the feature H1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping (same period) as the second image, the first image is positioned at a predetermined position relative to the second image. is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the performance executed by displaying the first image and the second image during the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player and improves the quality of the performance. can be done. In addition, the first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image or in a period not overlapping with the second image. A rendering of the mode can be executed, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to feature H1,
The control means is
Displaying the first image on the image display means in a period overlapping the second image in a plurality of different display modes,
According to each of the plurality of different display modes, the first image is arranged at a predetermined position relative to the second image (in the display/pattern table in the sixth embodiment, A gaming machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at a set layout position).

According to feature H2, the first image is displayed in a plurality of different display modes during a period overlapping (same period) as the second image. can perform the performance. Further, according to each of a plurality of different display modes, the first image is displayed on the image display means at an arrangement position relative to the second image at a predetermined position. , the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, various effects executed by being displayed during the period in which the first image and the second image overlap (the same period) do not give a complicated impression to the player, and improve the quality of the effects. can be made

[Feature H3]
A gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2,
When displaying the first image in a period overlapping with the second image, the control means controls a predetermined timing relative to the second image ( A gaming machine characterized in that the image is displayed on the image display means at the display timing determined by the layout/timing table/the display timing set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

According to feature H3, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping (same period) as the second image, the first image is displayed at predetermined timing relative to the second image. Therefore, the first image and the second image are never displayed at unrelated timings. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and furthermore, the quality of the effect is improved. can be done.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3,
The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when it is not displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is
Different from the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when displayed during the period in which the first image and the second image overlap (fifth embodiment) Display pattern table in / Display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature H4, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game differs between when the first image is displayed during a period when it overlaps with the second image and when it is displayed when it does not overlap with the second image. Since it suggests, the first image can be used to execute a plurality of different aspects of effects with different degrees of advantage/disadvantage in the game, and the first image can be effectively used. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage or disadvantage differs depending on whether or not it is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with other images. , interest and expectations can be improved. Even when an image combined with the second image is displayed, the image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position relative to the second image. A high performance can be provided to the player.

[Feature H5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
The first image and the second image suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage of different types of games (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature H5, each of the effects consisting of the first image, the effects consisting of the second image, and the effects consisting of the first and second images suggests the degree of advantage/disadvantage of different types of games. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage in various types of games depending on how a plurality of images are combined.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5,
The control means is
When the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. display and
A game machine, wherein when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

According to the feature H6, it is possible to make the effect of the first image and the second image feel comfortable to the player.

[Feature H7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time.

According to the feature H7, various effects can be executed by using an image that changes over time.

<Characteristic group I>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature I1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
an image display means for displaying an image as a production;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
A first image suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image suggesting the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game to the player and different from the first image. , is displayed on the image display means,
The first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image or displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, a predetermined timing relative to the second image (in the arrangement/timing table in the fifth embodiment) A gaming machine characterized in that the image is displayed on the image display means at the determined display timing/the display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

2. Description of the Related Art There are gaming machines that display an image on an image display means and execute an effect suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of a game to a player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. Also, these images are displayed under different conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap. A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting without considering the . As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a number of images may be superimposed and displayed, giving the player the impression that the presentation is complicated. The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game indicates the degree to which the state of the game cycle determined based on the special information is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. For example, in a pachinko machine, the state of the game round is advantageous to the player, such as the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, the expectation of the variable probability jackpot, the expectation of the variable probability state of the game round, etc. indicates the degree to which the

According to feature I1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed at predetermined timing relative to the second image. The first image and the second image are never displayed at irrelevant timings. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and furthermore, the quality of the effect is improved. can be done. In addition, since the first image may be displayed during a period overlapping (the same period as) the second image or during a period not overlapping the second image, the first image is used. A plurality of different modes of rendering can be executed using the first image, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine according to feature I1,
The control means arranges the first image at a predetermined layout position relative to the second image (the layout position determined by the layout/timing table in the fifth embodiment/the second image). A gaming machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at the arrangement position set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

According to feature I2, when the first image is displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image (the same period), the layout position relative to the second image is predetermined. is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the performance executed by displaying the first image and the second image during the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player and improves the quality of the performance. can be done.

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is
Different from the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when displayed during the period in which the first image and the second image overlap (fifth embodiment) Display pattern table in / Display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature I3, the degree of advantage or disadvantage in the game differs between when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and when it is displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image. Since it suggests, the first image can be used to execute a plurality of different aspects of effects with different degrees of advantage/disadvantage in the game, and the first image can be effectively used. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage or disadvantage differs depending on whether or not it is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with other images. , interest and expectations can be improved. Even when an image combined with the second image is displayed, the image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position relative to the second image. A high performance can be provided to the player.

[Feature I4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3,
The first image and the second image suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage of different types of games (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature I4, each of the effects consisting of the first image, the effects consisting of the second image, and the effects consisting of the first and second images suggests the degree of advantage/disadvantage of different types of games. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage in various types of games depending on how a plurality of images are combined.

[Feature I5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4,
The control means is
When the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. display and
A game machine, wherein when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to make the effect of the first image and the second image feel comfortable to the player.

[Feature I6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time.

According to the feature I6, various effects can be executed by using an image that changes over time.

<Characteristic group J>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature J1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
an image storage means for storing an image that enables the player to recognize the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation;
an image display means for displaying the image as an effect;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means is
displaying on the image display means the first image stored in the image storage means, the first image enabling the player to recognize the advantage or disadvantage of the game situation;
A combined image in which the first image is combined with a second image different from the first image, and is recognition of an advantage or disadvantage in a game situation without being combined with the second image. A combination image is displayed on the image display means that enables the player to recognize a different recognition from the recognition given to the player when the first image is displayed (in the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment). , the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing the appearance of a dog sticking out of the box, giving the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous. The display pattern (B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) in which object B is combined with object C is a display pattern showing how the dog in the box gets wet due to bad weather. Giving players the recognition that they are at a disadvantage/Modification 15)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature J1, when the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the second image, the recognition given to the player regarding the advantages and disadvantages of the game, and the first image and the second image. When the images are combined and displayed on the image display means, it is possible to change the perception given to the player as to the advantage or disadvantage of the game. images can be used effectively. Note that the game status is based on the game status, for example, whether the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, or whether the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is relatively high. say the situation.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to feature J1,
When displaying the first image in combination with the second image, the control means adjusts the relative position between the first image and the second image according to the game situation. (set to the layout position determined by the layout/timing table in the fifth embodiment/set to the layout position set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment) and display on the image display means Characteristic game machine.

According to feature J2, the relative position between the first image and the second image is set according to the game situation and displayed on the image display means. can be used to provide the player with various perceptions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2,
When displaying the first image in combination with the second image, the control means controls the relative timing of display on the image display means between the first image and the second image. is set according to the game situation (set to the display timing determined by the arrangement/timing table in the fifth embodiment/set to the display timing set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment), A gaming machine characterized by displaying on the image display means.

According to the feature J3, the relative timing of displaying the first image and the second image on the image display means is set according to the game situation and displayed on the image display means. Using the image and the second image, it is possible to give the player various recognitions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time.

According to the feature J4, it is possible to execute various effects by using an image that changes over time.

<Characteristic group K>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature K1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
image storage means for storing at least a first image, a second image and a third image;
an image display means for displaying the image stored in the image storage means;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image by the control means. (Image C3 in the sixth embodiment, in which the dog's face emerges from the box) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image. Despite giving favorable recognition,
By the control means, the first image (image C1 of the box in the sixth embodiment) is combined with the third image (image B3 of rain in the sixth embodiment) to display the image display means. , the second image (the image of the dog sticking out of the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). ) in combination with the image display means to give the player more advantageous recognition of the game situation than when it is displayed on the image display means.

According to the feature K1, the player is more likely to see the second image displayed without combination with the third image than when the first image is displayed without combination with the third image. Displaying the first image in combination with the third image is better than displaying the second image in combination with the third image, despite providing an advantageous perception of the game situation. , gives the player an advantageous perception of the playing situation. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects depending on how the images are combined. Further, even when the player recognizes the first image and the second image displayed on the image display means, the player recognizes that the game situation differs depending on whether or not the third image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the image displayed on the image display means.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to feature K1,
The image storage means stores a first time-varying image (object C that changes with time in the order of image C1, image C2, and image C3), which is an image that changes with time;
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images that form at least a part of the period of the first temporal change image in the time axis direction. game machine.

According to the feature K2, the first image and the second image are partial images that constitute at least a part of the time-axis direction of the first time-varying image. By extracting the image and combining it with the third image, further various effects can be executed.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
The control means is
a first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case of displaying the first image without combination with the third image on the image display means and then displaying the second image without combination with the third image on the image display means. A gaming machine characterized by having

According to the feature K3, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, or not. Therefore, various effects using the first image and the second image can be executed.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to feature K3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment, the display pattern (C1) The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the notice effect is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature K4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and then the second image is not displayed without being combined with the third image (first case). The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher when the special information is displayed (second case). Thus, in a first case in which the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, followed by a second case in which the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the state is It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition, and to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics, it is possible to perform various effects.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (object B that changes with time in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3), which is an image that changes with time;
The gaming machine, wherein the third image (image B3) is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time axis direction of the second time-varying image.

According to the feature K5, the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the period of the second time-varying image in the direction of the time axis. can be executed. For example, when displaying a combination of the first image, the second image, and the second time-varying image, the third image, which is part of the second time-varying image, may be the first image or the second time-varying image. If it is displayed in the same period as the image of 2, it can change the player's perception of the game situation.

<Characteristic group L>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature L1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition each time the game is played;
image storage means for storing at least a first image, a second image and a third image;
an image display means for displaying the image stored in the image storage means;
a control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image by the control means. In the case where (the image of the dog showing its face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Despite the high probability that
By the control means, the first image (image C1 of the box in the sixth embodiment) is combined with the third image (image B3 of rain in the sixth embodiment) to display the image display means. , the second image (the image of the dog sticking out of the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). ), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than when the special information is displayed on the image display means in combination with the special information.

According to the feature L1, when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the special information is more specific than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. Although the probability that the condition is satisfied is high, the case where the first image is displayed in combination with the third image is higher than the case where the second image is displayed in combination with the third image. There is a high probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions. Therefore, when the first image or the second image is displayed, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the third image is displayed.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
The image storage means stores a first time-varying image (object C that changes with time in the order of image C1, image C2, and image C3), which is an image that changes with time;
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images that form at least a part of the period of the first temporal change image in the time axis direction. game machine.

According to the feature L2, the first image and the second image are partial images that constitute at least a part of the time-axis direction of the first time-varying image, so the first time-varying image is displayed. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the third image is displayed.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2,
The control means is
a first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case of displaying the first image without combination with the third image on the image display means and then displaying the second image without combination with the third image on the image display means. A gaming machine characterized by having

According to the feature L4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, or not. Therefore, various effects using the first image and the second image can be executed.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to feature L3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment, the display pattern (C1) The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the notice effect is displayed.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature L4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and then the second image is not displayed without being combined with the third image (first case). The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher when the special information is displayed (second case). Thus, in a first case in which the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, followed by a second case in which the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the state is It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition, and to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics, it is possible to perform various effects.

[Feature L5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (object B that changes with time in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3), which is an image that changes with time;
The gaming machine, wherein the third image (image B3) is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time axis direction of the second time-varying image.

According to feature L5, the third image is a partial image that forms at least a part of the period in the direction of the time axis of the second time-varying image. can be executed. For example, when displaying a combination of the first image, the second image, and the second time-varying image, the third image, which is part of the second time-varying image, may be the first image or the second time-varying image. If it is displayed in the same period as the image of 2, it can change the player's perception of the game situation.

The inventions of the feature group F, the feature G group, the feature group H, the feature group I, the feature group J, the feature group K, and the feature group L solve the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art In a game machine such as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various game states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, there is a gaming machine that displays an object image on image display means and executes an effect that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such object images are prepared, and each object image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game.

Here, in the gaming machine as described above, there is a demand for further improvement in technology for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature group A to feature group L may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player; and information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry section;
a gaming machine comprising acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by said information acquiring means when a game ball enters said starting ball entering section.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each form described in the summary column of the invention are used to solve some or all of the above problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to appropriately replace or combine them. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. ..Window part 19...Glass unit 20...Upper tray 21...Lower tray 22...Exhaust port 23...Lever 24...Production operation button 25...Operating handle 30... Game board 31... Guidance rail 31a... Inner rail part 31b... Outer rail part 32... General winning opening 33... First starting opening 34... Second starting opening 34a... Electric Accessory 34b...Electric Accessory Drive Part 35...Through Gate 36...Variable Winning Device 36a...Large Winning Port 36b...Open/Close Door 36c...Variable Winning Drive Part 37...Special Figure unit 37a... First result display part 37b... Second result display part 37c... First reservation display part 37d... Second reservation display part 38... General figure unit 39... Round Display part 40... Variable display unit 41... Pattern display device 41a... Display surface 41aL... Display area 41aS... Display area 42... Nail 43... Out port 45... Main Display unit 46...Speaker 47...Various lamps 51...First control unit 52...Second control unit 53...Third control unit 54...Tank 55...Tank rail 56. ..Case rail 60...Main controller 61...Main control board 62...Main MPU
63... Main side ROM
64...Main side RAM
63a... Success/failure table storage area 63b... Distribution table storage area 63c... Reach judgment table storage area 63d... Variable time table storage area 63e... Stop result table storage area 63f... Command Information storage area 64a... Buffer for lottery counter 64b... Reservation information storage area 64c... Electrician reservation area 64d... Various counter areas 64e... Various flag storage areas 64f... First judgment processing result Storage area 67a...Various detection sensors 70...Payout control device 71...Payout device 80...Discharge control device 81...Game ball launching mechanism 85...Power supply device 86...Power failure monitoring circuit 90... Audio emission control device 91... Audio emission control board 92... Sound and light side MPU
93...Sound and light side ROM
93a... Production pattern table storage area 93b... Fluctuation display pattern table storage area 94... Sound and light side RAM
94a... Various flag storage areas 94b... Various counter areas 94c... Lottery counter area 100... Display control device 101... Display control board 102... Display side MPU
103... Program ROM
104...Work RAM
106...Character ROM
107... Video RAM
PA... Game area PC... Winning counter area AE... Execution area Ra... First reserved area Rb... Second reserved area

Claims (4)

information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
a notification means for sequentially notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game round;
a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
production execution means for executing production;
A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
When the special game state is executed, the effect to be executed in the special game state is determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game round executed after the special game state. game machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The production executing means is
In a first case where the special game state is executed and the special information relating to the predetermined game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, a predetermined effect is executed in the special game state. death,
When the special game state is executed and the special information relating to the predetermined game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect is performed in the predetermined game round. A gaming machine characterized by executing The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined effect is a effect that reproduces at least part of the effect executed in the game round executed before the special game state. The gaming machine according to claim 3,
When the game round executed before the special game state is defined as the first game round and the predetermined game round executed after the special game state is defined as the second game round,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes the effect executed by the effect executing means in the first game round when the special information relating to the first game round satisfies the predetermined condition. Characteristic game machine.

Images